bmw manual for e90
TRANSCRIPT
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 1/258
The UltimateDriving Machine
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle Contents
A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 2/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 3/258
318i320i325i
325xi330i
330xi335i
335xi
318d320d325d330d
330xd335d
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will
find driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the fol-
lowing advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your
new BMW. It contains important notes on how to operate the car,
enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technicaladvantages of your BMW. It also contains useful information
which will help you to uphold both the car's operating safety and
its full resale value.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents
of on-board literature.
We wish you many a safe and enjoyable journey,
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 4/258
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyNot to be reproduced, wholly or in part, withoutwritten permission from BMW AG, Munich.Order No. 01 41 0 013 270English II/07, 07 03 500Printed in GermanyPrinted on environmentally friendly paper,bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 5/258
Contents
The quickest access to a particular topic or item
is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index,
see page 236.
About this Owner's Handbook
4 Notes
Overview
8 Cockpit
14 iDrive
21 Voice input system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
41 Adjusting
50 Child safety55 Driving
70 Everything under control
84 Technical features for driving comfort and
safety
92 Lights
98 Climate
105 Practical interior equipment
Driving hints
120 Driving precautions
Navigation
130 Starting the navigation system
132 Destination input
147 Route guidance
158 What to do if ...
Entertainment
162 On/off and settings
166 Radio
171 Digital radio DAB
176 CD player and CD changer
183 AUX-IN port
184 USB/audio interface
187 TV
Mobility
192 Refuelling
195 Wheels and tyres
198 In the engine compartment
203 Maintenance205 Replacing parts
213 Mutual aid
Reference220 Technical data
231 Short commands for the voice input
system
236 From A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 6/258
N o t e s
4
Notes
About this Owner'sHandbook
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest
access to a specific topic or item is by consult-
ing the detailed alphabetical index at the end.
Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of
your car.
When the time comes to sell your BMW, please
remember to hand over this Owner's Hand-
book; it is an important part of the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
If you have any queries, BMW Service will be
glad to advise you.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet on
www.bmw.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Identifies optional extras or specific national-market items of equipment, as well as equip-
ment and functions not yet available at the time
of printing.
"..." Identifies texts on the control display for
selecting functions.
{...} Identifies commands for the voice input
system.
{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice input sys-
tem.
Symbol for components andassemblies
Recommends that you study the relevant
section of this Owner's Handbook in con-
nection with a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 7/258
5
Your individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Hand-
book describes all models and equipment
specifications which BMW offers within this
particular model line.
This explains why the Owner's Handbook may
also contain details of items which you have notordered. The differences can easily be identi-
fied by the asterisk * shown against optional
extras.
Should your BMW feature equipment which is
not described in this Owner's Handbook,
please refer to the Supplementary Owner's
Handbooks supplied with your vehicle.
In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the
controls are arranged differently from
those shown in the illustrations of this Owner'sHandbook.<
Status at time of printing
The high safety and quality standards of BMW
vehicles are maintained by unceasing develop-
ment work on designs, equipment and acces-
sories. In rare instances, your car may therefore
differ from the information supplied in the
Owner's Handbook.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
The advanced technology behind this car,
for example the use of modern materials
and high-performance electronics, means that
specially adapted methods of maintenance and
repair are required. Always have the necessary
work on your BMW performed either by BMW
Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW
specifications and has suitably trained person-
nel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
result in consequential damage and thus con-
stitute a safety risk.<
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends using parts and
accessory products on this vehicle that
are specifically approved for this purpose byBMW.
You are recommended to consult BMW Service
for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso-
ries, other BMW-approved products and com-
petent advice on all related matters.
The safety and compatibility of these parts and
products in conjunction with BMW vehicles
have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts
product liability for them.
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces-
sory products of any kind which it has not
approved.
BMW is unable to assess each individual prod-
uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use
on BMW vehicles without safety risk. This suit-
ability cannot be guaranteed even if an official
permit has been issued for the particular prod-
uct in a specific country. Tests performed for
such permits cannot always cover all operating
conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them
therefore are insufficient.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 8/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 9/258
OverviewThis summary of buttons, switches an
displays serves as an initial guid
In addition, it gives you an insig
into the principles behind the various wa
in which functions can be performe
Overview
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 10/258
C o c k p i t
8
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
3 Folding outside mirrors in and out* 47
4 Adjusting outside mirrors, parking position
function* 47
1 Safety switch for electric rear
windows 37
2Opening and closing windows 36
5 Headlight beam throw
adjustment* 94
6Side lights 92
Low-beam headlights 92
Automatic driving lights
control* 92
Adaptive Head Light* 94
High-Beam Assistant* 95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 11/258
9
9 Instrument cluster 10
12 Ignition lock 55
13 Buttons* on steering wheel
14 Horn, entire surface
15 Adjusting steering wheel 48
17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 198
7Fog lights* 96
Rear fog lights* 96
8Flashing turn indicators 60
High-beam headlights/headlight
flasher 94
High-Beam Assistant* 95
Parking lights* 94
Computer 72
Settings and information about the
vehicle 74
Instrument lighting 96
10Windscreen wipers 60
Rain sensor* 61
Touring:
Rear window wiper 61
11 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 55
Telephone*:
> Press: accept and end a call,
start dialling* for selected
phone numbers. Redial if no
phone number has been
selected
> Press for longer: redial
Volume control
Activating/deactivating voice input
system* 21
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Changing television channel
Scrolling through phone book andthrough lists with stored phone
numbers
Individually programmable 48
Individually programmable 48
16 Cruise control*for 4-cylinder engines 62
for 6-cylinder engines 63
Active Cruise Control* 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 12/258
C o c k p i t
10
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Flashing turn indicators
3 Indicator and warning lights 11
4 Displays for Active Cruise Control* 65
5 Revolution counter 70
6 Energy Control* 71
Engine oil temperature* 71
7 Display for
> Clock 70
> Outside temperature 70
> Indicator and warning lights 80
8 Display for
> Position of automatic gearbox* 57
> Computer 72
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining driving distance 75
> Distance recorder – odometer – and trip
distance recorder 70
> High-Beam Assistant* 95
> Checking engine oil level* 199
> Settings and information 74
> There is a Check Control
message 80
9 Fuel gauge 71
10 Resetting trip distance recorder 70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 13/258
11
Indicator and warning lights
The principle
Indicator and warning lights can come on in var-
ious combinations and colours in panel 1 or 2.
Some lights are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine starts
or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom of the control dis-
play explain the meaning of the indicator and
warning lights being shown.
You can call up additional information, e.g.
about the possible cause of a fault and about
what corresponding measures should be taken,
via Check Control, see page 80.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
Indicator lights without text messages
The following indicator lights in panel 1 confirm
that certain functions are active:
High-beam headlights/
headlight flasher 94
Fog lights* 96
Rear fog lights* 96
Light flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 87
Handbrake applied 57
Engine fault with adverse effect on
exhaust emissions 204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 14/258
C o c k p i t
12
Around the centre console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 15/258
13
1 Microphone for voice input system* and
hands-free mode for telephone*
2 SOS: initiating an emergency call* 213
3 Reading lights 97
4 Glass roof/panorama glass roof * 37
5 Interior lights 97
6 Indicator light* front passenger airbags 51
7 Control display 14
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 86
10 Central locking system 30
11 Automatic air-conditioning system
12 Ejecting
> Audio CD 162
> Navigation DVD with Business naviga-
tion system* 130
13 Changing
> Radio stations 166
> Tracks 177
14 Ejecting navigation DVD from Professional
navigation system* 130
16 Controller 14
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-
tally in four directions17 Calling up start menu on control display 15
18 Drive for navigation DVD for Professional
navigation system* 130
19 Favourites buttons/programmable memory
keys 19
20 Switching entertainment audio output on/
off and adjusting volume 163
21 Drive for
> Audio CD 162> Navigation DVD with Business naviga-
tion system* 130
Air distribution to the
windscreen 99
Air distribution to the upper body
area 99
Air distribution to the footwell 99
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate control 100
Cooling function 101
Automatic Air Recirculation Control
AUC 100
Recirculated-air mode 100
Maximum cooling 100
Residual heat utilisation 101
Air flow rate 100
Defrosting windows 101
Rear window heating 101
15Seat heating* 45
Park Distance Control PDC* 84
Saloon:
Roller sunblind* 108
Hill Descent Control HDC* 87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 16/258
i D r i v e
14
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large
number of switches. These functions thus can
be controlled from one central point. The basic
menu-guided operating principle is explained
below. Details of how to control individual func-
tions are provided under the descriptions of the
items of equipment concerned.
Controls
1 Control display
2 button
Calling up the start menu
3 Controller
The controller is used to select menu items
and adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrow 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Press, arrow 6
Only make adjustments if the traffic con-
ditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as
not to endanger the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 17/258
15
Menu summary
Communication
> Telephone*, see separate Operating
Instructions
> BMW Assist*, BMW Online* or TeleServ-
ice*, see separate Operating Instructions
Navigation or on-board info
> Navigation system
> On-board information, e.g. to display the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer*
> AUX-IN port, USB/audio interface* for
external audio device
> TV*
Climate
> Air distribution
> Automatic program
> Independent mode*
menu
> Switching off the control display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for traffic information
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dead-
lines for statutory inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five
menu items.
Calling up the start menu
Press the button.
To call up the start menu from the menu:Press the button twice.
Calling up menu items in the start menu
As of radio readiness, see page 55:
Using the start menu, you can call up the four
menu items of Communication, Navigation,
Entertainment and Climate by moving the con-
troller to the left, right, forwards or backwards.
You can call up the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Convenient call-up of menu items
With convenient call-up, you can:
> Call up a menu item from the start menu in
the view last displayed
> Switch directly between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the button
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 18/258
i D r i v e
16
To do so, move the controller in the relevant
direction and hold it in position for more than
about 2 seconds.
Displays in the menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The
currently active field appears highlighted in
the display.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last
selected.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 Arrows indicate that there are additional list
items which are not currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
Communication
Navigation or on-board info
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 19/258
17
Operating principle at a glance
This illustration shows how the vehicle can be
operated via iDrive.
The individual steps are explained under Set-
ting the clock, see page 78.
1 Select a menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight marker
moves
> Menu items in white can be selected by
highlighting them
2 To activate a menu item:
> Press the controller.
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is executed
3 Select a menu item: see 1
4 To switch between fields:
> Slightly move the controller to the left,
right, forwards or backwards
> Release the controller
> The active field becomes brighter in col-
our
5 To adjust settings:
> Turn the controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 20/258
i D r i v e
18
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD, TV* and external audio
source*
> Telephone*:
Name of network operator, no network,
or name of mobile phone registered with
the car
> "Car Phone"*:
Active voice connection for emergency
calls if BMW Assist is not enabled
> "BMW Assist"*:
Active voice connection with a
BMW Assist service
> "Online" or "GPRS Online"*:
Active connection with BMW Online*
2 Entertainment audio output off or dis-play for traffic reports*:
> "TP":
Traffic Programme is on
> "T":
Traffic Programme is off but traffic
reports can be received
> No display:
No traffic reports can be received
3 Display for traffic information*:
> "TMC":
Reception of traffic information for the
navigation system is possible and
switched on
> "TI+":
Reception of traffic information from V-
Info Plus is possible and switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries pending in "Calls not
accepted" *
> Roaming active
5 It is possible to use the telephone* if the
mobile phone is registered with the car
Mobile phone network reception
strength; display depends on the mobilephone
6 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or inputs via
the voice input system.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:
> The computer or journey computer*
> The arrow view or map view in vehicles with
navigation system*
> The current position*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 21/258
19
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window, and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to switch tothe assistance window, and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Exit assist. window" and press the
controller.
To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-
dow and press the controller.
Switching control display off/
on1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
Press the controller to switch on.
Favourites buttons/programmable memory keys
You can store certain functions of iDrive on the
favourites buttons/programmable memory keysand run them accordingly:
> Destinations in navigation*
> Entertainment:
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of the CD changer
> TV
> AUX
> Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the favourites buttons/pro-
grammable memory keys is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
Storing a function
Destinations in navigation*
1. Select a navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or in the address book.2. Press the ... button for longer
than 2 seconds.
Special features of the Professional navigation
system:
> If the route guidance has been started and
map view is active, the current destination is
stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 22/258
i D r i v e
20
> In the case of destination input via map, the
coordinates in the cross-hairs are stored,
rather than the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select it from a
list of stored phone numbers, e.g. the A-Z
list.
2. Press the ... button for longer
than 2 seconds.
If a name has been assigned to the phone
number, the name is also stored.
Entertainment
Independent of the selection on the control dis-
play, what is currently being heard is stored in
the Entertainment menu, e.g. a radio station.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. Press the ... button for longer
than 2 seconds.
On vehicles equipped with two drives, the
current track of a CD with compressed
audio files is stored.<
Running a function
Press the ... button.
The function is run immediately. This means,for example, that if a phone number is selected
the connection is established or if a navigation
destination is called up the route guidance is
started.
Displaying the assignment of thebuttons
You can display the assignment of the buttons
by touching them with your finger. Please do
not wear gloves when doing so. Touching withan object, e.g. a pen, does not work.
Displaying brief info
Touch the ... button.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
Touch the ... button for a longer
period.
Deleting the assignment of the buttons
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Favourite keys" and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all Favourite
keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 23/258
21
Voice input system
The principle
The voice input system enables you to operate
various items of equipment on your car without
having to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the control display
can be called up by means of spoken com-
mands. It is not necessary to use the controller.
The voice input system translates your com-
mands into control signals for the system in
question, and assists you by means of
announcements or questions.
The voice input system includes a special
microphone positioned near the interior mirror,
see page 12.
Condition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice input system is operating, so that the spo-
ken commands can be identified. Selecting the
language for iDrive, see page 83.
Symbols in the Owner's Handbook
Speaking commands
Activating voice input
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the control display and an
acoustic signal indicate that the voice input
system is ready to receive spoken com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the control dis-play.
This symbol appears on the control display if
further commands can be given.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Ending or interrupting voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can prompt the system to read out the
commands that are possible, depending on
which menu item is selected on the control dis-
play.
*
{...} Enunciate commands shown in thisform precisely as given.
{{...}} Identifies the replies by the voice
input system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 24/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 25/258
23
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Notes
More information about voice control of
the telephone appears in the separate
Operating Instructions.<
When speaking commands, note the following:
> Say the commands and numbers fluently
and at normal volume; avoid unnatural
emphases and pauses. This also applies to
spelling a destination entry.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice input system.
> When selecting a radio station, use thestandard pronunciation of the station name.
> When making entries in the voice-activated
phone book, use only names in the lan-
guage of the voice input system, and do not
use abbreviations.
> Keep doors, windows and the glass roof/
panorama glass roof closed to avoid noise
interference from outside the car.
> Avoid background noises in the car while
you are speaking.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 26/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 27/258
ControlThis chapter enables you to operate your c
with greater ease. All equipment items that a
of relevance for driving and make your journ
safer and more comfortable are described he
Control
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 28/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 29/258
27
> Triple turn signal, see page 60
> 12h/24h mode of the clock, see page 79
> Date format, see page 80
> Brightness of the control display, see
page 83
> Language on the control display, see
page 83
> Units of measure for fuel consumption, dis-tance covered/remaining range, and tem-
perature, see page 75
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC*, see page 85
> Welcome lights, see page 92
> Headlight courtesy delay feature, see
page 93
> Daytime driving lights, see page 93
> High-Beam Assistant, see page 95> Automatic air-conditioning system: AUTO
program, activating/deactivating cooling
function and Automatic Air Recirculation
Control, setting temperature, air flow rate
and distribution, see page 99 ff
> Audio volume, see page 163
> Tone settings, see page 163
> Speed-dependent volume control, see
page 164
Central locking system
The principle
The central locking becomes active when the
driver's door is closed.
The following are unlocked or locked in combi-
nation:
> Doors> Luggage compartment lid/tailgate
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
> With convenient access* by means of the
handles on the driver's and the front pas-
senger's door
The deadlocks are operated at the same time.
The latter prevent the doors from being
unlocked either at the safety lock buttons or
door handles. In addition, if the remote control
is used, the interior lights and the doors' ground
lights* are switched on or off. The alarm sys-tem* is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system, see
page 33.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, see
page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and theinterior lights are switched on.
Opening and closing:With the remote control
Persons remaining in the car or pets left
inside can lock the doors from the inside.
You should therefore take the remote control
with you when you get out of the vehicle so that
the latter can be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lights, the ground lights* and the
welcome lights come on.
You can also set the way in which the car is
unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 30/258
O p e n i n g a n d c l o s i n g
28
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Lock button" and press the control-
ler.
8. Select a menu item:> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
Press it twice to unlock the entire vehi-
cle.
9. Press the controller.
Convenient opening
Hold the button pressed.
The windows and the glass roof */panorama
glass roof * are opened.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the car from the outside when
there is someone inside it, as it cannot
then be unlocked from the inside in some
national-market versions.<
Convenient closing
Hold the button pressed.
The windows and the glass roof */panorama
glass roof * are closed.
Watch the closing movement to ensure
that no one is trapped. The closing proce-
dure is interrupted if the button is released.<
Switching on the interior lights
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
This function also enables you to locate the car,
for instance in a parking garage.
Saloon:Unlocking the luggage compartmentlid
Press the button for longer.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the
luggage compartment lid cannot be
opened unless the car has been unlocked.In order to avoid damage, make sure there is
sufficient clearance before opening the luggage
compartment lid. If the luggage compartment
lid had been locked before it was opened, it is
locked again as soon as it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the lug-
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-
ently unlocked.<
Touring:Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for longer.
The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the
tailgate cannot be opened unless the car
has been unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 31/258
29
If the tailgate had been locked before it was
opened, it is locked again as soon as it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
If you press the button on the remote
control for longer a second time within
three seconds, the roller-blind cover is raised*.
Before closing the tailgate, press the roller blind
down until it snaps into place.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can choose to have visual confirmation that
the car has been unlocked or locked.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press controller.
The signal is switched on.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction as a result
of interference from local radio signals. If this
occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock
with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is flat.
Use this remote control for a longer journey so
that the battery is recharged, see page 26. The
remote control for convenient access* contains
a battery that might have to be replaced, see
page 36.
Opening and closing:Via the door lock
You can set the way in which the car isunlocked, see page 27.
Do not lock the car from the outside when
there is someone inside it, as it cannot
then be unlocked from the inside in some
national-market versions.<
In some national-market versions, the
alarm system* is triggered when the car
is unlocked via the door lock.
To switch off the alarm:
Unlock the car with the remote control, seepage 27, or insert the remote control fully into
the ignition lock.<
For further details of the alarm system, see
page 33.
Convenient operation
At the door lock, you can operate the windows
and the glass roof */panorama glass roof *.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
Watch the closing movement to ensure
that no one is trapped. The movement is
stopped when the key is released.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 32/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 33/258
31
Luggage compartment lid/tailgate
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate.<
Opening from outside
Saloon
Press the button, see arrow, or press the
button on the remote control for a longer
period of time. The luggage compartment lid
will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.
On certain national-market versions, the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot
be opened with the remote control unless the
car has been unlocked.<
Touring
Press the button, see arrow, or press thebutton on the remote control for a longer
period of time. The tailgate will open slightly. It
can now be swung upwards.
On certain national-market versions, the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot
be opened with the remote control unless the
car has been unlocked.<
Press the button, see arrow, or press the
button on the remote control a second time for
an extended period within three seconds: the
roller-blind cover is raised.
Before closing the tailgate, press the cover
downward until it snaps into place.
Opening manually
Saloon
The integrated key of the remote control, see
page 26, fits the luggage compartment lid lock.
Turn the key to the left as far as it will go: the
luggage compartment lid will open.
If you unlock and open the luggage com-
partment lid with the key while the alarm
system is armed, the alarm will be triggered.
Switching off an alarm, see page 33.<
Touring
In the event of an electrical fault:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 34/258
O p e n i n g a n d c l o s i n g
32
1. From the luggage area, swing the cover on
the tailgate upwards.
2. Pull the ring upwards. The tailgate is
unlocked.
3. Open the tailgate and close the cover again.
The tailgate is locked as soon as it is pressed to
a close.
Emergency release*
Pull the lever in the luggage area. This will
unlock the luggage compartment lid.
Closing
The recessed handles in the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate make it easier
to pull the luggage compartment lid/tailgate
down.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
area of the luggage compartment lid/tail-
gate is unobstructed.<
Saloon
Touring
Touring: opening and closing the rearwindow
Small items can be loaded and unloaded
quickly when the rear window is opened sepa-rately.
The roller-blind cover is raised when the
rear window is opened. Before closing the
rear window, press the roller-blind down until it
snaps into place.<
Press the button: the rear window opens
slightly. It can now be swung upwards.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 35/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 36/258
O p e n i n g a n d c l o s i n g
34
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The
alarm is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is
made to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.
Interior movement detector
Before the interior movement detector can
operate correctly, the windows and glass roof *
must be closed.
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector can be switched off together. This pre-
vents false alarms, e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
trains, boats/ships or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior movement detector
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the car is locked.
The indicator light comes on for approx. two
seconds, then begins to flash steadily. The tilt
alarm sensor and interior movement detector
are switched off until the car is next unlockedand locked.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to access your
car without having to take the remote control
into your hand. It is sufficient to have the remote
control on your person, for example in a jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically recognises
your remote control when it is in the immediatevicinity or inside the car.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the car
> Unlocking just the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate
> Starting the engine
> Convenient closing
Operating requirements
> The car or the luggage compartment lid/tail-
gate can be locked only when the car ascer-
tains that the remote control on your person
is not inside the car.
> About two seconds have to elapse before
the car can again be unlocked and locked.
> The engine can be started only when the
car ascertains that the remote control on
your person is inside the car.
Comparison with the conventionalremote control
Generally speaking, it makes no difference
whether you control the functions outlined
above by using convenient access or by press-
ing the buttons on the remote control. Conse-quently, you should begin by familiarising your-
self with the instructions for opening and
closing, starting on page 26.
The features specific to convenient access are
described below.
A short delay when opening or closing the
windows or the glass roof/panorama
glass roof indicates that a test is being carried
out to ascertain whether there is a remote con-
trol inside the car. If necessary, please repeatthe opening or closing operation.<
Unlocking
Put your hand right round the handle of the
driver's or the front passenger's door, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control is detected inside the pas-
senger compartment after the car has been
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 37/258
35
unlocked, the electric steering wheel lock dis-
engages, see page 55.
Locking
Use your finger to touch the panel, arrow 2, for
approx. one second. This corresponds to
pressing the button.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
electrical consumers are switched off
prior to locking in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Convenient closing
For convenient closing, keep your finger on the
panel, arrow 2.
As of radio readiness, you can open and close
the windows, and also the retractable hardtop if
the car is stationary, as long as a remote control
is located inside the car.
Unlocking just the luggagecompartment lid/tailgate
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate. This corresponds to
pressing the button.
If a remote control inadvertently left
behind is detected inside the locked vehi-
cle's luggage area after you close the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate or rear window, the lidreopens slightly. The hazard warning flashers
flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Lightly touching the start/stop button switches
on radio readiness, see page 55.
Do not depress the brake or clutch, other-
wise the engine will start.<
Starting the engineYou can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert the remote control in
the ignition lock, see page 55.
Switching off the engine in vehicleswith automatic gearbox
The engine can be switched off only when the
selector lever is in position P, see page 57.
To switch off the engine with the selector lever
in position N, the remote control must be in the
ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with automaticgearbox into a car wash
1. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch the engine off.
The car will be able to roll.
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction as a resultof interference from local radio signals. In this
case, open or close the vehicle using the but-
tons on the remote control or with the inte-
grated key. You can subsequently start the
engine by inserting the remote control into the
ignition lock.
Warning lights
If the warning light in the instrument
cluster comes on when you attemptto start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not in the car
or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control
with you into the car or have it checked. If appli-
cable, try inserting a different remote control
into the ignition lock.
If the warning light in the instrument
cluster comes on while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the car. After the engine is then
switched off, it can be restarted only within
approx. 10 seconds.
If the indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the control display:
change the battery in the remote control.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 38/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 39/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 40/258
O p e n i n g a n d c l o s i n g
38
must be initialised. BMW recommends that you
have this work performed by BMW Service.
Manual closing*
In the event of an electrical fault, you can move
the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lights using the screwdriver from the toolkit,
see page 205.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for moving the roof manu-
ally.
5. Insert the Allen key from the toolkit, see
page 205, into the designated aperture.
Move the glass roof in the desired direction.
6. Install the control unit and reattach the
cover of the lights.
Touring:
Panorama glass roof*Observe the panorama glass roof during
the closing procedure to avoid any inju-
ries.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
From the closed position, the roof is raised and
the sliding trim opens slightly.
Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with
the roof in the raised position, as this
would damage the mechanism.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 41/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 42/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 43/258
41
Adjusting
Safe seated position
A seated position that suitably reflects your
requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv-
ing with a minimum of fatigue. In conjunction
with the seat belts, the head restraints and theairbags, the seated position has a major influ-
ence on your safety in the event of an accident.
You should therefore observe the following
notes in order to maintain the protective func-
tion of the car's safety systems.
For additional notes on child safety, see
page 50.
Airbags
Keep your distance from the airbags.Always grip the steering wheel on the rim,
with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock
positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the
hands or arms in the event of the airbag being
triggered off.
No other persons, pets or objects should be
held or permitted to remain between the airbag
and yourself.
Do not use the front airbag cover on the front
passenger's side as a tray. Make sure that the
front passenger adopts a correct seated posi-
tion, e.g. does not rest feet or legs on the instru-
ment panel; otherwise he/she could sustain leg
injuries in the event of the front airbag being
triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbags; other-
wise they could be injured should the airbags
deploy.<
Even if all these instructions are complied with,
certain injuries as a result of contact with theairbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending
on the circumstances in which an accident
occurs. Occupants with sensitive hearing may
be subject to brief and generally temporary
impaired hearing caused by the ignition and
inflation noise.
The locations of the airbags and additional
notes are given on page 90.
Head restraint
A correctly positioned head restraint reducesthe risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its centre is at approximately ear
level; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury should an accident occur.<
Head restraints, see page 43.
Seat belt
Before driving off, always make sure that alloccupants have fastened their seat belts. The
airbags are a complementary safety feature and
not a substitute for the seat belts.
Never restrain more than one person with
each seat belt. Babies or small children
must not travel on the lap of another occupant.
Make sure that the belt in the pelvic area is well
down on the hips and does not press on the
abdomen.
The seat belt must not be worn touching the
neck, pass over sharp edges or hard or fragile
objects, or become trapped at any point. Avoid
twisting the seat belt, pull it tight across the pel-
vis and shoulder, and keep it as close to the
body as possible; otherwise the belt in the pel-
vic area could slip over the hips and injure the
abdomen in the event of a frontal collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise
its restraining effect could be impaired.
Touring: if the rear centre seat belt is used, thewider backrest must be locked in position, see
page 113, otherwise the centre seat belt will not
have any restraining effect.<
Seat belts, see page 46.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 44/258
A d j u s t i n g
42
Seats
Before adjusting, note
Do not reposition the driver's seat while
the car is in motion. The seat could move
unexpectedly, leading to the driver losing con-
trol of the car, so that an accident could be
caused.
Do not recline the driver's or front passenger's
seat back too far, otherwise there will be a risk
of sliding under the seat belt in an accident, so
that the belt loses its protective effect.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 43 and on damaged seat belts
on page 47.
Adjusting manually
Comply with the instructions on page 42,
or there will be greater risks to personalsafety.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat orlift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Comply with the instructions on page 42,
or there will be greater risks to personal
safety.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 45/258
43
1 Longitudinal direction*
2 Height
3 Tilt*
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, see
Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
The seat back contour can be altered to support
the lordosis, the curvature of the lumbar section
of the spine.
The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal col-
umn are supported, to encourage an upright but
relaxed seated position.
> To increase or reduce the curvature: press
the switch at front or rear.
> To move the curved section up or down:
press the switch at top or bottom.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the switch at front or rear.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Head restraints
A correctly positioned head restraint reduces
the risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its centre is at approximately ear
level; otherwise, there is an increased risk ofinjury should an accident occur. Only remove a
head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat
in question. Refit the head restraint before
transporting a passenger on that seat; other-
wise the passenger will be without protection
from the head restraint.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 46/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 47/258
45
Seat heating*
Press once per temperature stage.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press and do not immediately release the but-
ton.
If you continue driving within approx. 15 min-
utes, the seat heating is automatically activated
at the previously set temperature.
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's-seat and outside-mirror
positions.
Settings for the seat back width and lumbar
support are not stored in memory.
Memorising
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
see page 55.
2. Adjust the seat and outside mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button comes on.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
The driver's seat and outside mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling up
Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ing, as unexpected seat movement could
result in an accident.<
Convenience function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, see page 55.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you press a seat adjustment switch or
touch one of the memory buttons.
Safety function
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, see page 55.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
until the adjusting procedure is completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
press the button again; the LED will go out.
Calling up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Otherwise, persons could be injured or objects
could be damaged should the seat start to
move towards the rear.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you press a seat adjustment switch or
touch one of the memory buttons.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 48/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 49/258
47
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their seat belts.
Damaged seat belts
If the seat belts have been exposed to
loads in an accident or damaged in any
way: replace the belt system, including the
seat-belt tensioner and any child restraint sys-
tems, and have the belt anchorage checked.Always have this work performed by BMW
Service or a workshop that operates to BMW
specifications and has suitably trained person-
nel, otherwise correct operation of these safety
systems is not ensured.<
Mirrors
Outside mirrorsThe outer sections of the mirrors show a larger
field of view* than the inner sections. In this
way, the view to the rear is extended and the so-
called blind spot is reduced in size.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not gauge your dis-
tance from following traffic based on what you
see in the mirror; otherwise there is an
increased risk of accident.<
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or parking
position function*
3 Folding mirrors in and out*
The setting for the outside mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the stored position is called
up automatically.
Adjusting manually
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At speeds up to approx. 20 km/h, approx.
12 mph, you can fold the mirrors in or out by
pressing button 3. This can be useful in narrow
streets, for instance, or to fold the mirrors back
out into the correct position after they have
been folded in manually. Mirrors that were
folded in fold back out automatically when the
car reaches a speed of approx. 40 km/h, approx.
25 mph.
Before driving through a car wash, fold
the mirrors in manually or by pressing
button 3; otherwise, they could be damaged
due to the width of the car.<
Automatic heating*
Both outside mirrors are heated automatically
while the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt-down –parking position function*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for thedriver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector
lever to position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. The road surface
close to the car, e.g. the kerb, is thus
brought within the driver's field of view in
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 50/258
A d j u s t i n g
48
the mirror, for instance while parking the
car.
The parking position function is switched
off when you are towing a trailer.<
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the front pas-
senger's-side mirror, arrow 2.
Inside mirror
Turn the knob to reduce dazzle from the head-
lights of cars behind you when driving at night.
Inside and outside mirrors, automatic-dim*
The automatic-dim function of the inside and
outside mirrors* is controlled by two photo-
cells in the inside mirror. One photo-cell is in the
mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back
of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo-cells clean, do not
cover the area between the inside mirror and
windscreen, and do not affix adhesive labels or
stickers of any kind to the windscreen directly in
front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, or an accident
may result from any unexpected movement.<
1. Fold lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Electric steering-wheel lock
The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-
cally when the remote control is removed or
inserted, see page 55.
Programmable buttons on steeringwheel
You can program the buttons to suit your per-
sonal preferences:
These settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 51/258
49
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.
A list showing various functions is dis-
played:
> "Voice output of nav. system"
Voice messages from the navigation
system*
> "Air circulation on / off"
Permanent shut-off of outside-air sup-
ply, see Automatic Air Recirculation
Control, AUC on page 100
> "Mute on / off"
To mute the audio sources
> "Display on / off"To switch the control display on/off
> "Telephone list"*To show/hide the telephone book or last
list of saved numbers displayed
> "Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select a button if appropriate and press the
controller.
The selected function can be operated with the
appropriate button.
Using the functions
Briefly press the appropriate button on thesteering wheel.
If you have programmed "Voice output of nav.
system" for one of the buttons:
> To switch voice messaging on/off:
Press the button for longer.
> To repeat last voice message:
Press the button briefly.
> To abort a voice message during an
announcement:
Press the button briefly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 52/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 53/258
51
Functional status
> The indicator light remains on if the front
passenger airbags have been deactivated.
> The indicator light does not come on if the
front passenger airbags have been acti-
vated.
Fitting child restraintsystems
BMW Service can supply suitable child restraint
systems for every age and weight class.
When selecting, installing and using child
restraint systems, observe the manufac-
turer's instructions, otherwise the protective
effect could be impaired.
Following an accident, have all components of
the child restraint system and the seat belt that
was used to secure it checked by BMW Serviceand renewed if necessary. Always have this
work performed either by BMW Service or by a
workshop that operates to BMW specifications
and has suitably trained personnel.<
Conventional child restraint systems are
designed to be secured with a lap belt or with
the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt.
Incorrectly or improperly fitted child restraint
systems can increase a child's risk of injury.
Always follow the instructions for installing thesystem precisely.
On the front passenger's seat
Before fitting a child restraint system to
the front passenger's seat, make sure
that the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury should the airbags
deploy.<
Seat height
Before fitting a universal child restraint system
to the front passenger's seat, move the seat up
as far as it will go in order to achieve optimal
placement of the seat belt. Do not change the
height of the seat after fitting the child restraintsystem.
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passen-
ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. After fitting the child seat, do not
change the setting. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-
ited.<
1. Set the backrest to maximum width, seepage 43.
2. Fit the child seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 54/258
C h i l d s a f e t y
52
ISOFIX child seat mountings
For details of how to install and use ISO-
FIX child restraint systems, please con-
sult the separate operating and safety instruc-
tions supplied by the system's manufacturer.<
Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems
The following ISOFIX child restraint systemsmay be used on the allocated seats in your vehi-
cle. The corresponding designations can be
found on the child seats.
Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors
Before fitting the child seat, pull the belt away
from the area around the child seat mountings.
Make sure that both lower ISOFIX
anchors are properly engaged and that
the child restraint system is resting securely
against the backrest.<
Rear seats with through-loadingsystem
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
located beneath the labelled caps.
Rear seats without through-loadingsystem
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
located at the positions marked by the arrows,
in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Front passenger's seat*
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
located at the positions marked by the arrows,
in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Mounting points for upper ISOFIXretaining strap
Use the mounting points for the upper
ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure
child restraint systems; otherwise, the mount-
ing points could be damaged.<
Rear seats Front passenger's seat*
A - ISO / F3 A - ISO / F3
B - ISO / F2 B - ISO / F2
B1 - ISO / F2X B1 - ISO / F2X
C - ISO / R3 C - ISO / R3
D - ISO / R2 D - ISO / R2
E - ISO / R1 E - ISO / R1
F - ISO / L1
G - ISO / L2
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 55/258
53
Saloon
For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an
upper retaining strap there are two additional
mounting points, see arrows.
Touring
For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an
upper retaining strap there are two additional
mounting points in the luggage area, see
arrows. To access the mounting points: remove
the respective cover.
Positioning the upper ISOFIX retainingstrap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
does not pass over sharp edges and is not
twisted on its path to the upper mounting point.
Otherwise the child restraint system cannot
protect the child as intended in the event of an
accident.<
Saloon: rear seats
Touring: rear seats
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf/luggage area floor
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of the child restraintsystem
Before use, flip the mounting points and the
head restraints* upwards, if necessary.
1. Push the head restraint upwards.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint posts.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 56/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 57/258
55
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting the remote control in theignition lock.
Insert the remote control fully into the ignition
lock.> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
> The electric steering wheel lock disen-
gages audibly.
Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock before you move the vehicle, other-
wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis-
engage and you will not be able to steer the
car.<
Convenient access*
With convenient access, only insert the remote
control in the ignition lock in exceptional cases,
see page 34.
Removing the remote control from theignition lock
Do not use force to remove the remote
control from the ignition lock, as other-
wise damage can occur.<
Before removing the remote control, first push
it in as far as it will go to release the locking
mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on
beforehand.
> The electric steering wheel lock engages
audibly.
Automatic gearbox
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Each time the start/stop button is pressed,
radio readiness or the ignition are switched on
or off.
The engine is started when you press the
start/stop button and depress the clutch if
the car has a manual gearbox, or the brake if the
car has an automatic gearbox.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> When you touch the panel above the door
lock, if the car is fitted with convenient
access*, see Locking on page 35
Ignition on
All electrical consumers are ready for operation.
The odometer and trip distance recorder are
displayed in the instrument cluster.
When the engine is switched off, please
switch off the ignition and all electrical
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 58/258
D r i v i n g
56
consumers you are not using, in order to pre-
serve the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator lights, warning lights and displays
in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engineNever run the engine in enclosed spaces,
as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can
lead to loss of consciousness with fatal conse-
quences. The exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, which is colourless and odourless,
but highly toxic. Do not leave the car unat-
tended with the engine running, as this consti-
tutes a hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the gearbox in idle or move the selectorlever to position P and fully apply the handbrake
to prevent the car from moving.<
Do not warm up the engine with the car at a
standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at
moderate engine speeds.
The engine is started when you press the
start/stop button and depress the clutch if
the car has a manual gearbox, or the brake if the
car has an automatic gearbox. If you do not wish
to start the engine, do not depress the clutch orbrake.<
Avoid starting, stopping and restarting
the engine in rapid succession as well as
repeated attempts to start the engine if it does
not fire, otherwise unburned or only partially
combusted fuel could reach the catalytic con-
verter, which could overheat and be damaged
as a result.<
Manual gearbox
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, in the vehicle, see page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.
3. Press the start/stop button.
Starting proceeds automatically for a certain
time, and ceases automatically as soon as theengine has started.
Automatic gearbox
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, in the vehicle, see page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.
Starting proceeds automatically for a certain
time, and ceases automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Diesel engine
When the engine is cold and the temperature is
below approx. 06/327, starting may be
delayed by automatic preheating. In the instru-
ment cluster, the preheat indicator light comes
on and at the same time a message appears on
the control display.
Stopping the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking on an incline, fully apply the
handbrake, otherwise the car could begin to
roll.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 59/258
57
Manual gearbox
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Engage first gear or reverse.
3. Fully apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, see page 55.
Automatic gearbox
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Fully apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, see page 55.
Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
a stationary car from rolling away; it acts on the
rear wheels.
Indicator light
The indicator light is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition: the handbrake is still applied.
Applying
The lever engages by itself.
Releasing
Raise slightly, press the knob and move the
lever down.
In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has
to be used to slow or stop the car, do not
pull the lever up too hard. Keep the knob on the
lever held in all the time.
Otherwise, violent application of the handbrake
could lock the rear wheels and cause the rear of
the car to skid.<
To prevent corrosion or an imbalance
between the brakes on the right and left
side, apply the handbrake lightly from time to
time when coasting to a standstill, provided thatit is safe to do so.
The brake lights do not come on when the
handbrake is applied.<
Manual gearbox
When shifting in the 5th/6th-gear plane,
press the shift lever to the right. Other-
wise the engine could be damaged if you inad-
vertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse
Engage this only while the car is standing still.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic gearbox withSteptronic*
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you canperform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic,
see page 59.
Stopping the car
Before leaving the car with the engine
running, move the selector lever to posi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 60/258
D r i v i n g
58
tion P and apply the handbrake to prevent the
car from moving.<
Taking out the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, see page 55.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake, otherwise the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
Apply the brake until you are ready to
move off; this will prevent the car from
creeping when a gear is selected.<
A lock prevents the selector lever from being
inadvertently moved to the R or P position. To
disengage the lock, press the button on the
front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Engage this only while the car is standing still.
The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Engage this only while the car is standing still.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The car will be able to roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Use this position for all normal driving. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the
regular full-throttle position; increased resist-
ance will be felt.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 61/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 62/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 63/258
61
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the pressure point.
The wipers switch to normal speed as the car
comes to a halt.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not fitted with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is fitted with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The
sensor is mounted on the windscreen, directly
in front of the inside mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rainsensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton comes on.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe orsensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 upwards or downwards.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rainsensor
Press button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic
car wash, to prevent the car's wipers from
being activated inadvertently and damaged.<
Cleaning windscreen and headlights*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed
onto the windscreen and the wipers are oper-
ated for a short time.
When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the
headlights are cleaned simultaneously at prac-
tical intervals.
Only operate the washer systems and
cleaning equipment if you are certain that
the fluid will not freeze to the windscreen and
interfere with the view ahead. Anti-freeze
should therefore be added to the fluid, see
Washer fluid.Do not run the washer systems if the washer
fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will
be damaged.<
Windscreen washer jets
The windscreen washer jets are heated auto-
matically while the engine is running or the igni-
tion switched on*.
Touring: rear window wiper
1 Intermittent wipe. When reverse gear isengaged, continuous operation is activated.
2 Cleaning the rear window
The rear window wiper does not move if the
lever is in position 1 before the ignition is
switched on.
To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Move the lever to its home position.
2. Select the desired position again.
Do not run the washer systems if the res-ervoir for washer fluid is empty, or the
washer pump will be damaged.<
Washer fluid
Anti-freeze for the washer fluid is highly
flammable. Keep it away from possible
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 64/258
D r i v i n g
62
ignition sources and store it only in the carefully
sealed original containers, out of reach of chil-
dren. Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only top up washer fluid when the engine
has cooled down. This prevents contact
with hot engine components. Otherwise, if thefluid is spilled, there is a risk of fire and personal
safety is endangered.<
All washer jets are served by a single reservoir.
When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has
been added if required, always follow the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
Mix the water and anti-freeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir, to make sure
the correct mixing ratio is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6 litres, approx. 10.6 Imp. pints.
Cruise control* for 4-cylinderengines
The principle
You can use the cruise control if road speed is at
least approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph. The car thenmemorises and maintains the speed that you
specify using the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control if driving at con-
stant speed is prevented by adverse con-
ditions, e.g. by winding roads, heavy traffic or
poor surface conditions such as snow, rain, ice
or loose material. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Memorising and maintaining speed or
accelerating
2 Memorising and maintaining speed or
decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is memorised and
maintained.
If engine braking alone is insufficient on a down-
hill gradient, the set speed may be exceeded. It
may in turn prove impossible to maintain speed
on uphill gradients if current engine power out-put is insufficient.
Increasing speed
Tap the lever repeatedly, arrow 1, until the
desired speed is reached.
Each time the lever is tapped, the car's speed
increases by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
Accelerating using the lever
Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speedis reached.
The car accelerates without the accelerator
pedal being pressed. The system memorises
and maintains the speed.
Reducing speed
Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until the
desired speed is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 65/258
63
Functions analogous to increasing speed or
accelerating, except that the speed is
decreased.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you depress the clutch or shift to idle
position in vehicles with manual gearbox
> When you move the selector lever to posi-
tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox
> When you drive above or below the set
speed for an extended time, e.g. by press-
ing the accelerator pedal
> When DSC is intervening
Recalling a speed memorisedbeforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The speed last mem-
orised is recalled and maintained.
The memorised speed is deleted as soon as the
ignition is switched off.
Cruise control* for 6-cylinder
engines
The principle
You can use the cruise control with brake func-
tion if road speed is at least approx. 30 km/h or
20 mph. The car then memorises and maintains
the speed that you specify using the lever on
the steering column. In order to maintain the
specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle
when the engine braking effect is insufficient on
downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control if adverse con-
ditions prevent driving at constant speed,
e.g. winding roads, heavy traffic or poor surface
conditions such as snow, rain, ice or loose
material. Otherwise you could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<
Manual gearbox
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. An indicator light notifies you that you
should shift gears when you drive for an
extended period at very high or very low engine
speeds, or the system is deactivated.
One lever for all functions
1 Memorising and maintaining speed or
accelerating
2 Memorising and maintaining speed or
decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is memorised and
maintained. It is displayed in the speedometerand briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. On downhill gradients, the
system will brake the car slightly if engine brak-
ing alone is insufficient.
Increasing desired speed
Press the lever repeatedly to the pressure point
or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed isset.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the pres-
sure point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
pressure point, the desired speed is
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 66/258
D r i v i n g
64
increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or
5 mph on the speedometer display.
The system memorises and maintains the
speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the pressure point, arrow 1,until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the pressure point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The car accelerates without the accelerator
pedal being pressed. The system memorises
and maintains the speed.
Reducing speed
Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until thedesired speed is displayed.
Functions analogous to increasing desired
speed, except that the speed is reduced.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays in the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you shift gears very slowly or shift to
idle position in vehicles with manual gear-
box
> When you move the selector lever to posi-
tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by pressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the memorised speed is again
achieved and maintained.
Warning light
The warning light comes on when the
cruise control has been deactivated
by using the handbrake or as a result
of DSC intervening. A message appears on the
control display.
Recalling a speed memorisedbeforehand
Tap the button, arrow 4. The memorised speed
is regained and maintained.
The memorised speed value is deleted and can
no longer be called up in the following
instances:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> Cars with manual gearbox: when you shift
gears very slowly or shift to idle position
> Cars with automatic gearbox: when you
move the selector lever to position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Memorised speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If --- km/h or --- mph temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.
Calling up Check Control messages, see
page 81.<
MalfunctionThe warning light comes on when the
system has failed. A message
appears on the control display. You
can find more information starting on page 80.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 67/258
65
Active Cruise Control*
The principle
Active Cruise Control enables you to select a
desired speed which the vehicle automatically
maintains when the road ahead of you is clear.
Within the limits of its capability, the system
automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle
in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the
distance is speed-dependent. To maintain dis-
tance, the system automatically reduces the
fuel supply, brakes slightly if necessary, and
accelerates again when the vehicle in front of
you starts to move more quickly. As soon as the
road in front of you is clear, the car is acceler-
ated to your desired speed. This speed will also
be maintained on downhill slopes, but may beunder-run on uphill slopes if engine output is
insufficient.
Read and carefully comply with the information
on the System limitations starting on page 68
so that you can understand the system's range
of applications and use the system appropri-
ately.
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-tem is braking, pedal sensation will be
slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking
are normal.
Manual gearbox
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. An indicator light notifies you that you
should shift gears when you drive for an
extended period at very high or very low enginespeeds, or the system is deactivated.
Range of applications
The ideal road-speed range for using the
system on well-developed motorways and sec-
ondary roads is about 80-140 km/h, approx.
50-85 mph. However, all local speed limit regu-
lations must be observed.
The minimum desired speed is 30 km/h or
20 mph, whereas the maximum desired speed
is 180 km/h or 110 mph.
Active Cruise Control does not release
you from your personal responsibility to
drive safely.
Consider road-surface, weather and visibility
conditions to decide whether and how the sys-
tem should be used.Use the system only when traffic is flowing
smoothly and not on unsurfaced roads or roads
with sharp bends nor when there is road ice,
fog, snow or heavy rain.
Adjust your desired speed to traffic conditions,
and check your driving speed and safety dis-
tance. Be prepared to brake at all times. Other-
wise, driving conditions could result which pose
a risk of accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Memorising and increasing desired speed
2 Memorising and decreasing desired speed
3 Deactivating cruise control, see page 67
4 Calling up memorised desired speed and
distance, see page 67
5 Selecting the distance from the vehicle
ahead, see page 66
Memorising the current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 68/258
D r i v i n g
66
The car's current speed is memorised. It is dis-
played in the speedometer and briefly in the
instrument cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or tap the lever to the pressure point or
beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis-
played.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the pres-
sure point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the
pressure point, the desired speed is
increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or
5 mph on the speedometer display.
The speed then displayed is memorised and
reached as soon as the road ahead of you is
clear.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
Other functions analogous to those described
under Increasing desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Press downwards:
Increase distance
> Press upwards:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Adapt distances to traffic and weather
conditions; otherwise, accident risks
could result. At the same time, be sure to
observe the required safety distance from the
vehicle in front of you.<
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
When you are using the system
for the first time after starting theengine, this distance is always
set. The distance in meters
corresponds to approximately
half of the numerical value in the
km/h speedometer display.
Distance 4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 69/258
67
Deactivating cruise control
Press the lever upwards or downwards,
arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer dis-
appear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When your road speed is less than 30 km/h
or 20 mph due to a traffic situation> When you shift gears very slowly or shift to
idle position in vehicles with manual gear-
box
> When you move the selector lever to posi-
tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
> When the system does not detect any
objects for a lengthy period of time, e.g. oninfrequently driven roads without defined
boundaries or due to a dirty radar sensor,
see page 68
When the system is deactivated, you
must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
manoeuvre as necessary, otherwise there is a
risk of accident.<
Warning light
The warning light comes on whenActive Cruise Control has been auto-
matically deactivated by driving
slower than 30 km/h or 20 mph, by using the
handbrake or as a result of DSC intervening. A
message appears on the control display.
Calling up memorised desired speedand distance
Tap the button, arrow 4.
The memorised speed and distance are
regained and maintained.
The memorised speed value is deleted and can
no longer be called up in the following
instances:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> Cars with manual gearbox: when you shift
gears very slowly or shift to idle position
> Cars with automatic gearbox: when you
move the selector lever to position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Memorised desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-
tance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control
systems are intervening; cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-
tem is activated
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-played
If --- km/h or --- mph temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 70/258
D r i v i n g
68
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control
messages, see page 81.<
Warning lights
The indicator 2 flashes in red, and
a signal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or manoeuvre the
vehicle yourself. Active CruiseControl cannot automatically restore the mem-
orised distance to the vehicle ahead.
This indicator does not release you from your
responsibility to adapt your desired speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.
The prerequisites for operating
Active Cruise Control are not met,
e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC
interventions. Active Cruise Con-trol is deactivated. You can reactivate the sys-
tem if desired by tapping or pulling the lever
when road and traffic conditions permit this. It is
not possible to call up the speed.
Radar sensor
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead
may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,
snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor
located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure
to use particular care when removing any layers
of snow or ice from the sensor.
When the radar sensor is not properly posi-
tioned, Active Cruise Control cannot be acti-
vated at all.
Malfunction
The warning light comes on when the
system has failed. A message
appears on the control display. You
can find more information starting on page 80.
System limitations
The detection range of the radar sensor and
automatic braking capacity are limited. It is pos-
sible, for example, that two-wheelers in front of
you are not recognised.
The system does not decelerate your car
when a standing obstacle is in the same
lane, e.g. a vehicle at a red light or at the end of
a traffic jam. Take the appropriate action your-
self, as otherwise there is a risk of accident.<
The system also does not react to oncoming
vehicles in the same lane.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 71/258
69
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle from a neighbouring lane
swerves into the lane in front of you, the system
does not detect the car until it is fully in the
same lane.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically.
The same applies when you are driving signifi-
cantly faster than the vehicle in front of you, e.g.
when you are rapidly approaching a lorry. There
is a risk of collision. Once the system has estab-
lished that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it
will indicate that you must brake and/or
manoeuvre the vehicle yourself. Take the
appropriate action yourself, as otherwise there
is a risk of accident.<
Characteristics in bends
If the desired speed chosen is too high for a
bend, the system reduces the speed while cor-nering. It cannot, however, detect bends in
advance. Therefore, choose a suitable speed
well before entering a bend.
Due to the radar sensor's limited detection
range, bends may lead to vehicles ahead being
detected only later or not at all.
When approaching a bend, the system may
temporarily react to vehicles in an adjacent lane
because of the curvature of the bend. Should
the system decelerate the vehicle in such an
instance, this can be compensated for by
pressing the accelerator pedal briefly. Once the
accelerator pedal is released, the system is
active again and regulates the car's speed auto-
matically.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press the accelerator pedal while driving with
Active Cruise Control, the automatic braking
function will be temporarily interrupted. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed or the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead is taken into account.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator
pedal, and make sure that no objects,such as floor mats, are pressing on the acceler-
ator pedal. Otherwise the system may not be
able to brake the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 72/258
E v e r y t h i n g u n d
e r c o n t r o l
70
Everything under control
Distance recorder, outsidetemperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature display and clock
3 Distance recorder – odometer – and trip dis-tance recorder
Knob in the instrument cluster
> When the ignition is on, pushing the knob
resets the trip distance recorder
> When the ignition is off, pushing the knob
displays the time, outside temperature and
odometer for a short time
Units of measureTo select the respective units of measure, km or
miles for the odometer as well as6 or7 for
the outside temperature, see page 75.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the clock, see page 78.
Outside temperature warning
Once the temperature reading falls to +36/
377, a signal sounds and a warning light
comes on. There is an increased risk of icy
roads.
Sheet ice can also form at temperatures
above +36/377. You should therefore
drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads,
for example; otherwise there is an increased risk
of accidents.<
Distance recorder – odometer – and tripdistance recorder
Resetting trip distance recorder:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
Car parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Revolution counter
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this zone the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 73/258
71
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning light will come on. In
addition, a message will appear on the control
display.
Checking coolant level, see page 202.
Energy Control*
Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This
enables you to check how economical and envi-
ronmentally friendly your current driving style
is.
Engine oil temperature*
With the engine at operating temperature, the
engine oil temperature lies between approx.
1006 and 1206, approx. 2127 and 2487.If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity:
> Petrol engine: approx. 63 litres, approx.
13.9 Imp. gal.
> Diesel engine: approx. 61 litres, approx.
13.4 Imp. gal.
Notes on refuelling, see page 193.
If the car's inclination varies while driving, forexample on a long mountain road, the value in
the display may fluctuate to some extent.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message is shown on the control dis-
play for a short time and the remaining operat-
ing range is displayed on the computer. If the
remaining range is less than approx. 50 km,
approx. 30 miles, the message is displayed per-
manently on the control display.
If the remaining operating range is below
50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to
add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
not assured and damage may occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 74/258
E v e r y t h i n g u n d
e r c o n t r o l
72
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Range> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption*
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure, see
Units of measure on page 75.
Range
This display indicates how far the car can prob-ably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.
The range is calculated on the basis of the way
the car has been driven over the past 30 km,
approx. 20 miles, and the amount of fuel cur-
rently in the tank.
If the remaining operating range is below
50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to
add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
not assured and damage may occur.<
Average speed
The calculation of average speed ignores any
stationary periods during which the engine was
switched off.
With the journey computer, see page 73, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset the average speed: press the button in
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period since the engine was last started.
With the journey computer, see page 73, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption*
Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This
enables you to check how economical and envi-
ronmentally friendly your current driving style
is.
Displays on the control display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controlleruntil "On-board Info" is selected and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 75/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 76/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 77/258
75
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 72
3 When the lights are switched on: instrument
lighting brightness 96
4 Calling up Check Control 80
5 Checking engine oil level* 199
6 Setting the clock 78
7 Setting the date 79
8 Viewing Next Service indicator 75
Exiting displaysThe outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
You can set units of measure.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Units" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select the desired menu item and press thecontroller.
7. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Next Service indicator
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 78/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 79/258
77
troller until "Status" is selected and press
the controller.
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if
applicable, inspections required by law is dis-
played.
You can call up more information on each entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No servicing is currently needed.
Servicing or an inspection required by law
is due. Please schedule a service appoint-
ment.
Servicing is overdue.
Entering deadlines for statutoryinspections*
Make sure that the date on the control display is
always set correctly, see page 79, otherwise
the Condition Based Service CBS cannot func-
tion correctly.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.7. Select "Stat. vehicle insp." and press the
controller.
8. Select "Schedule date for service" and
press the controller. The month is selected.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The year is selected.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The date input is memorised.
To exit the menu:
Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 203.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 80/258
E v e r y t h i n g u n d
e r c o n t r o l
78
Clock
The settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use, see also Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the clock
In the instrument clusterTo set the 12h/24h mode, see Setting the time
format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu is displayed.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the controller forwards
to switch to the uppermost field.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 81/258
79
6. Turn the controller until "Clock" is selected
and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings
8. Turn the controller to set the hour and press
the controller.
9. Turn the controller to set the minute and
press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal*
Shortly before the hour, three signal tones will
be emitted.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is switched on.
Setting the time format
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Date
The settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use, see also Personal Profile on
page 26.
Adjusting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, see
Setting the date format below.
1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 82/258
E v e r y t h i n g u n d
e r c o n t r o l
80
4. Select "Date" and press the controller.
5. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first part of the date setting is selected.
6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
7. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The next part of the setting is selected.
8. Complete the setting. Once the setting has
been completed, the system accepts the
new date.
Setting the date format
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Date format" and press the control-ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Check Control
The principle
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any faults in the systems mon-itored. A Check Control message includes indi-
cator or warning lights in the instrument cluster,
an acoustic signal in some circumstances, and
text messages at the bottom of the control dis-
play.
Indicator and warning lights
Indicator and warning lights can come on in var-
ious combinations and colours, both in panel 1
and display 2.
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can have the Check Control
messages shown later on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom of the control dis-
play explain the meaning of the indicator andwarning lights being shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 83/258
81
For most Check Control messages you can
have additional information displayed, e.g.
regarding the possible cause of a malfunction
and what measures should be taken, see
page 81.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
when the corresponding light comes on.
Exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages remain in the
display until the faults have been rectified.
These messages cannot be hidden. If several
faults occur at the same time, they are dis-
played in succession.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
they may be marked with the symbol
shown here.Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are not deleted.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
they may be marked with the symbol
shown here.
Viewing Check Control messagesstored in memory
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding light is shown. It
is accompanied by a text message on the
control display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Viewing additional information later on
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 84/258
E v e r y t h i n g u n d
e r c o n t r o l
82
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Check Control messages" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select and press the controller.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed at which you are to be
alerted by means of a Check Control message.
You can use this feature e.g. to ensure that you
do not exceed a municipal speed limit.
A renewal of this reminder will not be given until
you have undercut the limit speed once by at
least 5 km/h, approx. 3 mph.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing limit
1. Select a speed value and press the control-
ler.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the limit.
3. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
Adopting actual speed as the limit
Select "Accept current speed" and press the
controller. The actual speed is adopted as the
limit value.
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is switched on.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 85/258
83
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller. The
stopwatch starts at the time displayed.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and starts again if it
was running previously.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
Timekeeping is stopped.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interm. time" and press the controller.
The intermediate reading is displayed below
the current time display.
You can also call up other functions at any
time while the stopwatch is running. The
stopwatch continues to run in the back-
ground.<
Altering settings
Language on the control display
The language used on the control display can
be changed. The setting is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can switch to another language
for the display texts and navigation mes-
sages.
6. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
Brightness of the control display
The brightness is automatically adjusted to
ambient light conditions. Note, however, that
you can change the basic setting while the low-
beam headlights are switched on. The setting is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Brightness" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is obtained.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 86/258
T e c h n i c a l f e
a t u r e s f o r d r i v i n g c o m f o r t a n d s a f e t y
84
Technical features for driving comfort andsafety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The principle
PDC assists you with manoeuvring into a park-
ing space. Acoustic signals and a visual indica-
tor warn you of the presence of an object in
front of * or behind your car. Four ultrasonic
sensors in either bumper measure the distance
to the nearest object.
The sensors cover a range of approx. 2 m,
approx. 6 ft 7 in. However, an acoustic warning
does not sound until an object is approx. 60 cm,
approx. 2 ft, from the front sensors* or rear cor-
ner sensors, and approx. 1.50 m, approx. 5 ft
from the rear centre sensors.
PDC is a parking aid which is capable of
registering objects approached at low
speed, as is usually the case when the car is
being parked. Avoid approaching an object rap-
idly, otherwise the system may be unable to
alert you in sufficient time due to the physical
principles involved.<
If the car is towing a trailer, the rear sensors will
be unable to supply meaningful signals. Theytherefore do not come on.
Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx.
1 second when you engage reverse gear or
move the gear selector lever to position R. Wait
briefly before starting to drive, to allow the sys-
tem to become active.
Switching on manually
Press the button; the LED comes on.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED will go out.
If you drive for approx. 50 m, approx. 55 yd, or at
a speed exceeding approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph,
the system is deactivated and the LED goes
out. Switch the system on again as necessary.
Audible warning signals
An intermittent tone indicates the position of an
object as the car approaches it. For example,
the tone sounds at the rear if the systemdetects an object behind the car. The closer the
car approaches the object, the more rapid the
sequence of signals. When the distance to a
detected object is less than approx. 30 cm,
approx. 12 in, the signal becomes continuous.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> If you remain in front of an object that was
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall.
Malfunction
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC has failed. A
message appears on the control dis-
play. Have the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 87/258
85
As a precautionary measure, keep the sensors
clean and free from ice, so that they always
operate reliably. When using a high-pressure
cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended
periods of time and only from a distance of at
least 10 cm, approx. 4 in.
Manual operation
The LED above the button flashes in addition.
PDC with optical warning
You can have the presence of an object indi-
cated on the control display. The contours of
distant objects are already shown on the control
display before an audible warning signal
sounds. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "PDC" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Display on" and press the control-
ler.
The PDC image is switched on.
The display is shown on the control display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
PDC is no substitute for your personal
assessment of obstructions. The sensors
have certain dead areas in which objects cannot
be detected. In addition, the identification of
objects may not be possible if the physical lim-
its of the ultrasonic measuring principle are
exceeded, for instance with trailer noses and
hitches, and thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,
may enter the sensors' dead areas before or
after a continuous audible signal is given.
Higher, protruding objects such as ledges maynot be detectable. Loud sound sources outside
or inside the car can drown out the PDC sig-
nal.<
Driving stability controlsystems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Anti-lock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when
the brakes are applied. The car remains steera-
ble even under full braking. This increases
active safety.
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is
started. Safe braking, see page 121.
Electronic Brake Force DistributionEBV
The system regulates the braking pressure on
the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking
behaviour.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 88/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 89/258
87
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lights for DTC in
the instrument cluster come on.
As a check
If the indicator light is flashing:
DTC is regulating the propulsive and
braking forces.
If the indicator lights are on:DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lights
in the instrument cluster go out.
xDrive*
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.
xDrive and DSC interact with one another to fur-ther optimise traction and dynamic driving.
Depending on the driving situation and prevail-
ing road conditions, the xDrive four-wheel-drive
system distributes driving power variably to the
front and rear axles.
Hill Descent Control HDC*
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that regu-
lates your vehicle's speed on steep downhill
gradients and makes your BMW's handling
even easier to control under these conditions.
The vehicle then moves at slightly more than
double walking speed without you having to
intervene.
You can activate HDC below a speed of approx.
35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When driving down-
hill at a speed below approx. 35 km/h, approx.
22 mph, the speed is then automatically
reduced to slightly more than double walking
speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
You can vary the speed within a range of approx.
5 to 25 km/h, approx. 3 to 22 mph, by pressing
the accelerator pedal or the brake.
You can set a target speed in the same range
using the steering-column lever of the cruisecontrol*.
1 Increasing speed
2 Reducing speed
Activating HDC
Press the button; the indicator light comes on.
The indicator light flashes when the vehicle is
being braked automatically.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the indicator light goesout.
HDC is automatically deactivated:
> At speeds above approx. 60 km/h, approx.
40 mph
> After the ignition is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 90/258
T e c h n i c a l f e
a t u r e s f o r d r i v i n g c o m f o r t a n d s a f e t y
88
Using HDC
With manual gearbox:
Use HDC in low gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic gearbox:
You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster*
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC indicator
Malfunction
If the HDC indicator goes out while HDC mode
is active or does not appear:
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to high
brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Drive-off assistant with
6-cylinder enginesThe drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the handbrake for this.
1. Hold the vehicle in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the vehicle
in place for approx. 2 seconds after thebrake is released. Depending on the vehicle's
load or if towing a trailer, the vehicle may roll
backwards a little during this time. After releas-
ing the brake, drive off without delay. After
approx. 2 seconds, the drive-off assistant will
no longer hold the vehicle in place and the car
will start to roll backwards.<
Run Flat Indicator RPA
The principle
The Run Flat Indicator monitors the pressures
in the tyres while the car is being driven. The
system reports any significant loss of pressure
in one tyre in relation to another.
If a tyre loses pressure its rolling radius
changes, and this in turn alters the speed of
rotation. This alteration is detected and inter-
preted as a puncture.
Operating requirements
The system has to be initialised with all four
tyres inflated to the correct pressures in order
for it to respond reliably in detecting a puncture.
The system has to be reinitialised every
time tyre pressures are corrected, after
each change of a wheel or tyre, and after a trailer
has been attached or detached.<
System limitations
The Run Flat Indicator is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tyre damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tyres over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
> System was not initialised
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery sur-
faces
> Sporty style of driving: high slip at the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are fitted
Initialising the systemInitialisation is completed while the car is
on the move, but this can be interrupted
at any time. Initialisation resumes automatically
as soon as the car starts moving again.
Do not initialise the system while snow chains
are fitted.<
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 91/258
89
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Flat Tyre Monitor" is selected andpress the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not drive off yet.
7. Select "Confirm tyre pressure" and press
the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Drive off.
Initialisation is completed while the car is on
the move, without any feedback.
Indication of a flat tyre
The warning light shows red. A mes-
sage appears on the control display.
In addition, an acoustic signal is emit-
ted. There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre
pressure.
1. Carefully reduce your speed to no more
than 80 km/h or 50 mph. Avoid violent or
sudden braking and steering manoeuvres.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h or
50 mph after this.
If the car is not fitted with run-flat
tyres, see page 196, the standard
equipment by design, do not continue driv-
ing. Any attempt to drive on after a puncture
can result in a severe accident.<
2. Check the pressures in all four tyres at the
next opportunity.
If all four tyres are inflated to the cor-
rect pressures, the Run Flat Indicator
might not have been initialised. In this case
initialise the system.<
3. If a tyre is completely deflated, you can esti-
mate how far you will be able to drive using
the following guidelines:
> With low loads:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles
> With moderate loads:
2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 per-
sons without luggage:
Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles
> With a full load or while towing a trailer:
4 or more persons, luggage area full:
Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles
Drive with caution and do not exceed
80 km/h or 50 mph. If there is a loss of tyre
pressure, the vehicle's handling properties willchange. These include reduced track stability
during braking, longer braking distances and
altered self-steering properties.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tyre has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over to a suitable location as
soon as possible. Otherwise, parts of the tyre
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 92/258
T e c h n i c a l f e
a t u r e s f o r d r i v i n g c o m f o r t a n d s a f e t y
90
may come loose, which could result in an acci-
dent. Do not drive the car any further; contact
BMW Service instead.<
Malfunction
The indicator light shows yellow. A
message appears on the control dis-
play. The Run Flat Indicator is mal-
functioning or has failed. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.
Active steering*
The principle
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels, depending on the speed atwhich you are driving.
At lower speeds, e.g. in the city or while parking,
the turning angle is increased, i.e. smaller steer-
ing wheel movements and less effort are
required to turn the wheels. At higher speeds, in
contrast, the turning angle is increasingly
reduced. Your BMW's handling is thus
improved across all speed ranges.
In critical situations, the system can correct the
wheel turning angle resulting from the driver'ssteering and thus stabilise the vehicle before
the driver takes any action. This stabilising
intervention function is deactivated when DSC
is switched off, see page 86.
Malfunction
The warning lights come on. Active
steering is malfunctioning and deac-
tivated. At low speeds greater steer-
ing wheel movements are necessary,at high speeds the car reacts more sensitively
to steering wheel movements. The stabilising
intervention may also be deactivated. Drive
cautiously and think well ahead. Have the sys-
tem checked.
Two-stage brake lights*
On the left: normal braking
On the right: sharp braking while the rear foglights are off *.
Airbags
There are the following airbags beneath the
covers indicated:
1 Front airbags for driver and front passenger
2 Head airbags in the front and rear
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 93/258
91
Protective effect
Comply with the instructions on page 41,
or there will be greater risks to personal
safety.<
The front airbags protect the driver and front
passenger in the event of a head-on collision, if
the protective action of the seat belts alone
would be insufficient. The head-level and side
airbags provide protection in the event of a
side-on collision. The side airbag has the effect
of supporting the upper body from the side. The
head-level airbag supports the head of the
seat's occupant.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered off in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor collisions or if the car is struck from the
rear.
Never attach any material to the airbag
covers with adhesive, place material overthem or modify them in any other way. Do not fit
seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-
cifically approved for seats with integral side air-
bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of
clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-
rests. Do not dismantle the airbag occupant
restraint system. Do not modify the individual
components of the system or its wiring in any
way. This includes the upholstered covers on
the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats androof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining.
Do not remove the steering wheel.
Avoid touching the system's components
immediately after it has been triggered off, as
there is a risk of sustaining burns.
If the airbag occupant restraint system malfunc-
tions, is to be decommissioned or has been trig-
gered, have it checked, repaired, dismantled
and the airbag generators scrapped only by
BMW Service or a workshop that operates to
BMW specifications and has appropriatelytrained personnel and the required permits for
handling explosives. Otherwise, work per-
formed incorrectly can lead to failure or inad-
vertent triggering of the system and to inju-
ries.<
Operational readiness of the airbagsystem
As of radio readiness, see page 55, the warning
light comes on briefly, indicating the operational
readiness of the entire airbag system and the
belt tensioners.
Airbag system faulty
> Warning light does not come on when radio
readiness or the ignition is switched on.
> Warning light remains lit.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, as there is
otherwise the risk that the system will not func-
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe
accident occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 94/258
L i g h t s
92
Lights
Side lights/low-beamheadlights
0 Lights off
1 Side lights
2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights
3 Automatic driving lights control*, daytime
driving lights*, welcome lights, High-Beam
Assistant* and Adaptive Head Light*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off
automatically if the light switch is in position 0,
2, or 3.
If required, switch on the side lights, switch
position 1.
Side lights
When the switch is in position 1 the lights are on
all round the car. You can use the side lights for
parking.
With the ignition switched off, only the outer
chambers of the tail lights are lit up, see
page 208.
The side lights will discharge the battery.
Therefore, you should not leave them onfor longer periods of time, as otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the right or
left parking lights, see page 94.<
Low-beam headlights
The low-beam headlights come on when the
light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is
switched on.
Automatic driving lights control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low-beam
headlights are switched on and off automati-
cally depending on ambient light conditions,
e.g. in a tunnel, twilight, and in precipitation.
Adaptive Head Light* is active. When the low-
beam headlights are on, the LED next to the
symbol is lit. You can also activate the daytime
driving lights, see page 93. In the above-men-
tioned situations, the system then switches
automatically from daytime driving lights to low-
beam headlights.
The headlights may also come on when the sun
is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low-beam headlights remain
switched on irrespective of the ambient
light conditions if you switch on the fog
lights*.<
The driving lights control function cannot
substitute for your personal judgement of
when it is necessary to switch on the lights. The
sensors are unable, for instance, to recognise
fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety risk in
such situations, switch on the low-beam head-
lights manually.<
Welcome lights
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when parking and switching off the vehicle, the
side lights and interior lights light up briefly
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating the welcomelights
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 95/258
93
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Light" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller. The welcome lights are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
If you activate the headlight flasher after parking
the car, with the lights switched off, the low-
beam headlights come on and remain on for a
certain time.
You can adjust the operating period or deacti-
vate the function.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Light" and press the controller.
6. Select "Home lights" and press the control-
ler.
7. Turn the controller to set the appropriate
duration.
8. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime driving lights
The daytime driving lights light up in switch
position 3.
Activating/deactivating daytimedriving lights*
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Light" and press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lights" and press
the controller.
Daytime driving lights are switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 96/258
L i g h t s
94
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The principle
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight con-
trol system that optimises the illumination ofthe road ahead as the car corners. The light
cones from the headlights are directed to suit
the road ahead on the basis of steering angle
and other parameters.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, see page 92.
To avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehi-
cles, Adaptive Head Light is not active when thecar is reversing and directs the light to the front
passenger's side when the vehicle is at a stand-
still.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic driv-
ing lights control flashes. Adaptive Head Light
is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Headlight beam throwadjustment
Halogen headlights
The beam throw of the low-beam headlights
must be adjusted manually to suit the load car-
ried in the car, otherwise the drivers of oncom-
ing vehicles could be dazzled:
The second value in each case applies when
towing a trailer.
0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage
1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage
1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage
22 = 1 person, luggage area full
Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 222.
Xenon headlights*
The headlight beam throw is regulated auto-
matically, e.g. when accelerating and braking
and to adapt to various loads being carried.
High-beam headlights/parking lights
1 High-beam headlights
2 Headlight flasher
3 Parking lights*
Right or left parking lights*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lights on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the car, press the lever up or down
beyond the pressure point for a longer period,
arrow 3.
The parking lights will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, you should not leave
them on for longer periods of time, as otherwise
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 97/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 98/258
L i g h t s
96
Switching off via iDrive
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Light" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "High-beam assistant" and press
the controller.
The High-Beam Assistant is switched
off.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Fog lights
1 Fog lights*
2 Rear fog lights*
To switch on or off, press the respective button.
Fog lights*
The side lights or low-beam headlights must be
switched on. The green indicator light in the
instrument cluster comes on when the fog
lights are in use.
If automatic driving lights control has
been activated, the low-beam headlights
come on automatically when the front fog lights
are switched on.<
Rear fog lights*
The low-beam headlights or side lights with fog
lights must be switched on. The yellow indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster comes on
when the rear fog lights are in use.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the side lights or the low-
beam headlights are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-
play, accompanied by the brightness set-
ting and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 99/258
97
3. Press button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness.
4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lights
The interior lights, the footwell lights*, the doorentry lighting*, the luggage area light and the
ground lights* are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the ground lights are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To protect the battery, all lights inside the
car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, see Start/stop but-
ton on page 55.<
Switching interior lights on/offmanually
Interior lights, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
If the interior lights, footwell lights*, door entry
lighting* and ground lights* are to remain off
permanently, press the button of the front inte-
rior light for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lights
There are reading lights at the front and rear*,
next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 100/258
C l i m a t e
98
Climate
1 Air to windscreen and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draught-free ventilation 101
3 Air to the footwell
4 Manual air distribution
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Manual air flow control
9 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/
recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window heating
15 Air inlet grille for interior temperature sen-
sor, keep unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the control display, see page 99.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 101/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 102/258
C l i m a t e
100
In the lowest setting, there is continuous cool-
ing.
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
06/327 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic air-conditioning system
switches to the lowest temperature and oper-
ates in recirculated-air mode. Air flows at maxi-
mum rate only from the outlets for the upper
body area. You should therefore open these
outlets for maximum cooling.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windscreen and
side windows, towards the upperbody area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow and your temperature specifications will be
adapted to outside influences as a result of sea-
sonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window mist.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally in the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
You can set the intensity of the air supply in the
AUTO program. This changes the duration oftime during which the vehicle interior is heated
or cooled.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Adjusting air flow manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce air flow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it.
You can switch the automatic air flow control
back on by pressing the AUTO button.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the auto-
matic air-conditioning system. All indicators go
out.
Press any button except REST to reactivate the
automatic air-conditioning system.
Automatic Air Recirculation ControlAUC/recirculated-air mode
Activate the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air is constantly entering
the car.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensordetects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-
essary, the system blocks the supply of out-
side air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
outside air supply is shut off permanently.
The air inside the car is recirculated.
If the windows fog over in the recircu-
lated-air mode, switch it off and, if neces-
sary, increase the air flow rate.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality
of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually
deteriorate.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 103/258
101
Via a button* on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between recirculated-air
mode and the previous mode using an individu-
ally programmable button on the steering
wheel, see page 9.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the car's interior, for
instance when waiting at a school
to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on whenever the
following conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> The engine is at operating temperature
> Battery voltage is sufficient
> The outside temperature is below 25 6/777
The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.
As of radio readiness, you can adjust the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-
bution.
Defrosting windows
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windscreen and
the front side windows.
To do so, also switch on the cooling function.
Switching cooling function on/off
When the cooling function is on, air
is cooled and dried, then reheated
according to the temperature set-
ting. Depending on weather conditions, the
windscreen may fog over momentarily when
the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled if the engine is
running.
Rear window heating
The heater is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on the equipment ver-
sion, upper wires are used as an aerial and are
not part of the rear window heating.
Ventilation
1 Knurled wheels to open and close the air
outlets continuously
2 Levers for changing the direction of the air-
flow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air via
the air outlets for the upper body
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the outlets so that cool air is directed
towards you, e.g. if the car's interior has
become hot.
Draught-free ventilation
Adjust the outlets so that the airflow passes the
occupants without striking their bodies directly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 104/258
C l i m a t e
102
Ventilation in the rear
1 Knurled wheel to open and close the air out-
lets continuously
2 Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn towards blue: cooler
> Turn towards red: warmer
3 Levers for changing the direction of the air-
flow
Micro-filter/activated charcoal filter
The micro-filter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated charcoal filter in
addition removes gaseous pollutants from the
air entering the car. This combined filter is
changed by BMW Service during routine main-
tenance work.
Independent ventilation/heating system*
The principle
The independent ventilation system ventilates
the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature under some circumstances.
The independent heating system warms up the
passenger compartment; snow and ice can be
removed more easily.
Two different switch-on times can be pre-
selected. The systems can also be switched on
or off directly or via the remote control. They
remain switched on for 30 minutes.
Due to their high power consumption, you
should not switch on the systems twice in a row
without first letting the battery recharge while
the vehicle is being driven.
Both systems are operated via iDrive or the
remote control, see page 104.
Independent ventilation system
The independent ventilation system is
switched on, either with the remote control or at
a pre-selected switch-on time, above an out-
side temperature of approx. 156/597. If
operated directly, the independent ventilationsystem can be used at any outside tempera-
ture, but not while the vehicle is being driven. If
no independent heating system is fitted, the
independent ventilation system is operational
at a pre-selected switch-on time at any outside
temperature.
The air emerges through the outlets for the
upper body area in the dashboard. The outlets
must therefore be open.
Independent heating system
The independent heating system is switched
on, either with the remote control or using a
pre-selected switch-on time, under an outside
temperature of approx. 156/597. If operated
directly, the independent heating system can
be used at any outside temperature, but not
while the vehicle is being driven.
If you have not used the independent
heating system for several months, it maybe necessary to switch the system on again
after a few minutes for the independent heating
system to start up.<
While the ignition is switched off, the warmed
air is directed automatically to the windscreen,
the side windows and the footwell.
As of radio readiness, you can adjust the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-
bution.
The independent heating system continues torun for a short while after being switched off.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air-conditioning system goes out.
Never operate the independent heating
system in enclosed spaces, as inhaling
the harmful exhaust gas can lead to loss of con-
sciousness with fatal consequences. The
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 105/258
103
is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.
Switch off the independent heating system
while refuelling.<
The independent heating system will not
come on if the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank lasts for fewer than approx. 50 km,
approx. 30 miles of driving. The independent
heating system switches off if the exhaust pipe
under the front bumper is obstructed, e.g. whenyou drive forwards into a pile of snow. This can
result in the formation of smoke.<
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Independent mode" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Direct operation" and press the
controller.
5. Select "Independent heater" or "Independ-
ent ventilation" and press the controller.
The independent ventilation/heating sys-
tem is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air-conditioning system flashes.
Pre-selecting switch-on timesiDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Call up start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Independent mode" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Switch-on times" and press the
controller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first part of the time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The next part of the setting is selected.
9. Complete the setting. Once the setting has
been completed, the time is memorised.
Activating the switch-on time
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2", and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 106/258
C l i m a t e
104
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air-conditioning system lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air-conditioning system flashes when the sys-
tem has switched on.
The relevant system is switched on within
the next 24 hours only. Afterward, it must
be reactivated.<
Remote control*
1 Switching off
2 Switching on
3 LED
4 Aerial
The reception-dependent average range is
approx. 150 m, approx. 165 yd.
The range is best when you hold the
remote control as high as possible with
the aerial pointing up. When switching on and
off, do not touch the aerial.<
Switching on
1. Press button 2 until LED 3 lights up in
green.
2. Within approx. 3 seconds, press button 2
again. The LED 3 flashes in green.
The symbol on the display of the automaticair-conditioning system flashes.
Switching off
1. Press button 1 until LED 3 lights up in red.
2. Within approx. 3 seconds, press button 1
again. The LED 3 flashes in red.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air-conditioning system goes out.
Identical frequencies
The remote control can malfunction due to
nearby external systems or devices using the
same frequency.
Replacing batteriesReplace the batteries if the LED no longer lights
up or flashes when the independent ventilation
or heating system is switched on.
1. Remove the cover for the battery compart-
ment, see arrow.
2. Insert batteries of the same type. The
proper orientation of the batteries is shown
on the bottom of the battery compartment.
3. Attach the cover.
Dispose of old batteries only at an author-ised collecting point or hand them in to
BMW Service.<
New remote control
Should you wish to use a new remote control as
an additional remote control or as a replace-
ment for a lost remote control, your BMW Serv-
ice will be glad to initialise it for you.
You can use two remote controls for your vehi-
cle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 107/258
105
Practical interior equipment
Integrated universal remotecontrol*
The principle
The integrated universal remote controlreplaces up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters for various systems or devices that are
operated by radio remote control, for example a
garage or gate opener or lighting systems. The
integrated universal remote control identifies
and learns the signals transmitted by the origi-
nal hand-held transmitters.
The signal from an original hand-held transmit-
ter can be programmed to one of the three
memory buttons 1. After this, the programmedmemory button 1 will operate the system in
question. Transmission of the signal is shown
by the LED 2.
If and when you decide to sell your car, in the
interests of security clear the programmed
functions, see page 106.
During the programming operation and
before a programmed system is operated
with the integrated universal remote control,
make sure that no persons, animals or objectsare within the pivoting or movement range of
the system in question, as otherwise injury or
damage could result. Comply also with the
safety instructions supplied with the original
hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the pack or in
the instructions supplied with the origi-
nal hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
A list of compatible hand-held transmitters can
be found on the Internet at
www.eurohomelink.com. You can also call the
toll-free HomeLink Hotline under
0800 0466 35465 or alternatively under
+49 (0)6838 907 277 in Germany.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
1. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.
2. When using for the first time: press the left-
hand and right-hand memory button 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.
The three memory buttons are cleared.
3. Point the original hand-held transmitter at
memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.
10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and memory
buttons 1 depends on the system accord-
ing to which the original hand-held trans-
mitter operates.<
4. Press the command button on the original
hand-held transmitter and the desired
memory button 1 on the integrated univer-
sal remote control at the same time. The
LED 2 initially flashes slowly. When the
LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release both
buttons. If the LED 2 does not start to flash
rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change
the distance and repeat the step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 108/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
106
5. To program additional original hand-held
transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the same signal as the origi-
nal hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched on.
If the device fails to function even afterrepeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To establish this, either
consult the operating instructions for the origi-
nal hand-held transmitter or press the pro-
grammed memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control for a longer period. If
the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote
control flashes rapidly for a short while and then
remains lit for about two seconds, the original
hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-codesystem. If it uses an alternating-code system,
program the memory buttons 1 as described
under Alternating-code hand-held transmit-
ter.<
Alternating-code hand-heldtransmitter
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be operated. The instructionsshould indicate what scope there is for synchro-
nisation.
When programming an alternating-code hand-
held transmitter, the following additional points
should be noted:
Programming will be easier if another per-
son is available to assist you.<
1. Park your car within the range of the radio
remote control device.
2. Program the integrated universal remotecontrol as described above under Fixed-
code hand-held transmitter.
3. Establish the location of the button on the
receiver of the device to be operated, e.g.
on the drive system.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be operated. Once step 4 has
been performed, step 5 must be completed
within about 30 seconds.
5. Press programmed memory button 1 on
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the same signal as the origi-
nal hand-held transmitter.
If you have any queries, please contact
your BMW Service centre.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left-hand and right-hand memory
button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. All memorised programs are
deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Point the original hand-held transmitter at
memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.
10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and memory
buttons 1 depends on the system of the
particular original hand-held transmitter.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 on the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.20 seconds, press the command button of
the original hand-held transmitter. When
the LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release
both buttons. If the LED 2 does not start to
flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds,
change the distance and repeat the step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 109/258
107
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the cardinal or interme-
diate compass direction in which you are driv-
ing.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location, so that the com-
pass can function correctly; see the world map
with compass zones below.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 110/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
108
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are near your vehicle
and that you have enough space to drive in a
circle.
2. Set the correct compass zone for your cur-
rent location.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive at least
one full circle at a speed of no more than
7 km/h or 4 mph.
If calibration was successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Roller sunblinds*
Roller sunblind for rear window
Tap the button in the centre console to raise or
lower the roller sunblind.
Roller sunblinds for rear side windows
Pull the loop on the roller sunblind and hook it
into the mounting.
Glove box
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove box comes on.
After using the glove box while the car is
moving, close its lid without delay, so that
it cannot cause injury in the event of an acci-
dent.<
Closing
Swing lid up.
Locking
To lock the glove box, use the integrated key of
the remote control, see page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 111/258
109
Rechargeable hand lamp*
The rechargeable hand lamp is located on the
left-hand side of the glove box. It can remain
plugged in. Whenever required, pull the lamp
out of the socket.
Only insert the lamp into the socket when
it is switched off, otherwise there is a risk
of damage.<
Centre armrest
Storage compartment
Depending on the version, the centre armrest
between the front seats contains either a com-
partment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*.
For more details on this mobile phone provi-
sion, see the separate Operating Instructions.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Ventilated storage compartment
The storage compartment in the centre armrest
can be ventilated: push the switch toward the
rear.
The temperature can be adjusted using the
knurled wheel for rear-ventilation temperature
control, see page 102.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system.
> AUX-IN port, see page 183
> USB/audio interface*, see page 184
Storage compartments in thepassenger compartment
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, storage compartments are next to the
steering column*, on the front doors and in the
centre console*.
There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.
Coat hooks
There are coat hooks on the grab handles in the
rear seating area.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, as they
could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in
case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 112/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
110
Drinks holders*
Use light-weight and breakproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages.
Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of an accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the drinks holders;
otherwise damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the centre of the cover.
Closing
Press the centre of the cover and push in the
drinks holder.
Front ashtray*
Opening
Push the projection on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be pulled out when it
pops back out.
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 113/258
111
Rear ashtray*
Opening
Push the projection on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Connecting electricalappliances
In your BMW, you can use electrical devices
such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc.,
up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts if at least one
of the following sockets is provided. Do not
damage the sockets by attempting to insert
plugs of the wrong pattern.
Cigarette lighter socket*Access to the socket: pull the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the centre armrest
External audio device, see page 109.
Sockets in the rear centre console*
Remove the respective cover.
Socket in the luggage area*
Saloon
Touring
Open the cap.
Saloon: through-loadingsystem*
Opening
1. Open the belt lock of the rear centre seat
belt. To do so, press the button, see arrow,
and release the seat belt tongue.
2. Insert the seat belt tongue at the end of the
belt into the specially designated mounting
on the rear parcel shelf.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 114/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
112
3. Push the relevant head restraint all the way
down, see page 44.
4. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the luggage area.
5. The released rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forwards by
pushing the head restraint.
Fastening
1. Fold the rear seat backrest back into the
position for sitting and engage it.When returning the rear seat backrest
into the position for sitting, make sure
that the seat's locking mechanism engages
properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown
about in the event of sharp braking or eva-
sive manoeuvres and endanger the occu-
pants.<
2. Release the seat belt tongue from the
mounting on the rear parcel shelf and insert
it into the belt lock of the centre seat belt.
The seat belt tongue must be heard to
engage.
There are lashing eyes in the luggage area to
which luggage area nets* or retaining straps
can be attached when loads have to be secured,
see page 123.
Touring:Luggage area
Make sure that no fluids are leaking in the
luggage area. Otherwise the vehicle could
be damaged.<
Roller-blind cover
Pull out the cover and hook it into the holders.
Do not place any objects on the cover, asthey could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.
Do not allow the cover to be retracted in an
uncontrolled manner, as otherwise it could be
damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 115/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 116/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
114
Storage compartments in theluggage area
Saloon
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, there are the following storage options in
the luggage area:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for stowinga box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD
jackets, depending on vehicle equipment
version
> Net* for securing small objects, to be
attached to the mountings of the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella> Net for small objects on the right side trim
panel of the luggage area
> Retaining straps next to the rear lashing
eyes, e.g. for securing an umbrella
> Folding, removable box* under the floor
panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items
> Storage compartment under the floor panel
> Insertable dividers* and removable storage
tray for the storage compartment under thefloor panel
> Drawer for stowing small items. To release
it, pull the handle firmly. If required, you can
take the drawer fully out, see below
Do not drive or close the luggage com-
partment lid when the drawer is pulled
out.
On uphill gradients, release the drawer care-
fully, as otherwise it could slide out suddenly on
its own and cause injury.Do not exceed a maximum load of 5 kg/11 lbs
for the drawer, as otherwise damage could
result.<
Removing the drawer
1. Push the drawer all the way in.
2. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way out.
3. Take out the drawer by pulling it down and
backwards.
Refitting the drawer
1. Hook the guides of the drawer into the frontof the yellow fixtures on the bottom of the
luggage area.
2. Insert the catches into the supports on the
bottom of the luggage area.
3. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way in.
Touring
The following storage options are available in
the luggage area:
> Umbrella holder underneath the casing for
the partition net
> Rubber straps on the left and right side trim
panels for securing small objects such as a
folding umbrella
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 117/258
115
> Hooks for hanging up shopping bags or tote
bags, for example, on the left and right sides
of the luggage area
> Net for small objects on the right side trim
panel of the luggage area
> Storage compartment under the floor panel
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, there are additional storage options in theluggage area:
> Net* for securing small objects, to be
attached to the mountings of the floor panel
> Net* on the left side trim panel of the lug-
gage area instead of the rubber strap
> Versatile raised floor panel with integrated
protective tarp* for luggage area or bumper
> Folding, removable box* under the floor
panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items
> Insertable dividers* and removable storage
tray for the storage compartment under the
floor panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 25 kg or 55 lbs for the storage
compartment under the floor panel, as other-
wise damage could result.<
Saloon
Push it up to the ceiling of the luggage area; a
catch holds the floor panel in place. To remove,
pull the floor panel out of the catch.
Specification with drawer:
Take the retaining strap on the right-hand side
of the drawer out of the holder and use it to lock
the floor panel in place.
Touring
Fold up the floor panel and remove it or lean it
forwards.
Lashing eyes
There are lashing eyes in the luggage area for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, see page 123.
Ski bag*
The ski bag facilitates the safe and clean trans-
port of up to four pairs of standard skis or up to
two snowboards.
You can stow skis up to a length of 2.10 m,
approx. 6 ft 10 in, with the aid of the ski bag. If
skis of this length are carried, however, the
capacity of the ski bag is lower in view of itstapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the centre armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the hinged cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 118/258
P r a c t i c a l i n t e r i o r e
q u i p m e n t
116
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
4. Insert the tongue of the ski bag's retaining
strap in the centre belt buckle.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap pro-
tective material around sharp edges to prevent
damage.
Securing the load
After loading the ski bag, secure the bag and its
contents by tightening the retaining strap at its
turnbuckle.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, as it could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sud-
den swerving.<
To stow away the ski bag, follow the opposite
procedure as for loading.
Removing the ski bag
You can remove the ski bag for quick drying, for
example, or if you want to use other fittings.
1. Fold down the centre panel in the rear-seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Take out the fitting, arrow 2.
For more information on the various fit-
tings available, contact BMW Service.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 119/258
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 120/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 121/258
Driving hintsHere is a variety of informatio
that you may need in particu
driving situations or operating mode
Driving hints
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 122/258
D r i v i n g p r
e c a u t i o n s
120
Driving precautions
Running in
Moving parts require some time before they can
interact smoothly with one another. Please
comply with the following instructions, which
are intended to ensure that your car achieves itsoptimum operating life and economy.
Engine and final drive
Observe the national speed limits in the country
in which you are travelling.
Up to 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles
Drive at varying road and engine speeds, but do
not exceed the following values:
> Petrol engine
4500 rpm, or 160 km/h or 100 mph
> Diesel engine
3500 rpm, or 150 km/h or 90 mph
Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic
gearbox kick-down.
From 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles,onwards
Engine and road speeds can be graduallyincreased.
Tyres
New tyres do not achieve their full road
grip immediately, for production reasons. You
should therefore drive in a restrained manner
for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.
Brakes
Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favoura-
ble wear and contact pattern until the car has
covered about 500 km, approx. 300 miles. Drive
with caution during this running-in period.
Clutch
The clutch needs to be run in for about 500 km,
approx. 300 miles, before it will operate with
maximum efficiency. Operate the clutch gently
while running it in.
After fitting new parts
The same running-in procedures should beobserved if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the luggage compartment lid/tailgate
Drive only with the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate and rear window closed, other-
wise exhaust gases could enter the passenger
compartment.<
If it is nevertheless necessary to travel with the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate or rear win-
dow open, observe the following precautions:
1. Close all the windows and the glass roof.
2. Turn the air flow rate of the automatic air-
conditioning system well up, see page 100.
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures in the exhaust system
occur with all vehicles. Never remove the
heat shields protecting the exhaust system, nor
apply underseal to them. Make sure that when
the car is driven or parked and when the engine
is idling, no easily flammable material such as
hay, leaves, grass, etc. comes into contact with
the hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a
fire, with the risk of severe injuries or damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise
there is a risk of burns.<
Diesel particle filter*
The diesel particle filter collects soot particles
and burns them periodically at high tempera-
tures. This cleaning procedure takes several
minutes. Under some circumstances, you may
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 123/258
121
notice it by the fact that the engine temporarily
runs more roughly and requires a higher engine
speed for normal power development. In addi-
tion, the exhaust may cause some noise and
emit a small amount of smoke, even after the
engine has been switched off.
Mobile communication equipment
BMW advises against the use of mobilecommunication devices such as mobile
phones inside the car, unless they are directly
connected to an outside aerial. Mutual interfer-
ence between the vehicle's electronics and
such devices cannot be entirely ruled out.
Moreover, there is no guarantee that the radia-
tion generated when such devices are transmit-
ting will be dissipated out of the vehicle's inte-
rior.<
Climatic comfort windscreen*
Use the area marked in the illustration for your
garage-door opener, electronic devices for toll
logging, or similar. This area does not have an
infrared-reflective coating and is clearly distin-
guishable from inside the car.
Aquaplaning
When driving on wet or slushy surfaces,
reduce speed to prevent a wedge of water
from forming between the tyre and the road.
This situation, known as aquaplaning, means
that the tyre can actually lose contact com-
pletely with the road surface, so that neither the
car can be steered nor the brake be properly
applied.<
The risk of aquaplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tyres, see also Minimum
tread depth on page 195.
Driving through water
Drive through water only to a max. depth
of 30 cm, approx. 1 ft, and no faster than
walking pace, otherwise the engine, electrical
system and gearbox may be damaged.<
Apply the handbrake on uphillgradients
Never try to prevent the car from rolling
back on an uphill gradient by slipping the
clutch; always apply the handbrake. The clutch
will otherwise wear rapidly.<
In vehicles with 6-cylinder engines, the drive-off
assistant offers additional help, see page 88.
Safe braking
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as standard.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations in which this isnecessary. Since the car remains steerable, you
can avoid obstacles by turning the steering
wheel as smoothly as possible.
The pulsating sensation at the brake pedal,
combined with the sound of the hydraulic sys-
tem operating, indicates that ABS is interven-
ing.
Wet roads
In damp weather or heavy rain, apply the brakesbriefly with light pedal pressure every few kilo-
metres/miles. When doing so, make sure that
no other road user is hindered. The resulting
heat dries the brake discs and pads. The brak-
ing force will then be available immediately if
needed.
Downhill gradients
To avoid impairing the efficiency of the
brake system as a result of overheating,drive down long or steep descents in the gear
that allows you to keep brake applications to a
minimum. Otherwise even slight, continuous
pressure on the brake could cause overheating,
brake pad wear or even brake system failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down through the gears all the way to
first gear, if necessary. This avoids overburden-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 124/258
D r i v i n g p r
e c a u t i o n s
122
ing the brakes. Downshifting in manual mode of
the automatic gearbox, see page 59.
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the gearbox in neutral or with the
engine switched off; engine braking action will
not be present, or there will be no power assist-
ance to the brakes or steering.
Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired
by floor mats, carpets or other objects.<
Corrosion of brake discs
If the car is used for short distances only, is
parked for lengthy periods or subjected to only
minor loads, the brake discs will be particularly
susceptible to corrosion and the brake pads will
collect dirt; this is because the brake pressure
necessary for a self-cleaning effect is not gen-
erated.
When the brakes are applied, corroded discstend to judder, and even lengthy brake applica-
tions usually fail to eliminate this effect entirely.
Car parked
Moisture condensate forms in the automatic
air-conditioning system and is discharged
underneath the car. Traces of water on the
ground are therefore normal.
Before entering a car washGeneral information about care of your BMW is
provided in the booklet Looking after your car.
Touring: rear window wiper
In automatic car washes, there is a risk of dam-
age to the rear window wiper. If necessary, ask
the car wash operator about appropriate pro-
tection measures.
With convenient access and automaticgearbox
Insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off with the selec-
tor lever in position N. See also page 35.
Rule of the road
When entering countries where the traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road to the
country in which your car is registered, certain
measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the
drivers of oncoming vehicles.
BMW Service is able to supply masking film.
Note the instructions enclosed with the filmwhen applying.
Load
Avoid overloading the car, as this could
cause the tyres' carrying capacity to be
exceeded. The tyres could then overheat and
sustain internal damage. This could lead to sud-
den pressure loss.<
Loading
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backs.
> Wrap protective material round sharp cor-
ners and edges.
> When carrying very heavy loads with no
passengers on the back seat, insert both
outer seat belts into the respective opposite
buckles.
Saloon
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 125/258
123
Touring
> Use the partition net to protect passengers,
see page 113. Make sure that objects can-
not poke through the partition net.
> Do not stack items higher than the top edge
of the seat backs.
> Wrap appropriate protective material
around objects that could strike the rear
window while the car is on the move.
Securing the load
> Small and relatively light items can be
retained with tensioning straps, a luggage
area net* or other suitable straps*.
> BMW Service can supply suitable lashings*
for securing larger or heavier loads. Four
lashing eyes are provided for attaching the
lashing equipment. Two are located on the
luggage-area side walls 1, two more are on
the rear luggage-area panel 2.
Please comply with the information pro-
vided with the lashing equipment.
Always stow and secure the load as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or avoiding action is necessary.
Do not exceed the car's permitted gross weight
or the axle load limits, see page 222, otherwise
the car's operating safety may be endangered
and the construction and use regulations
infringed.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be dis-
lodged, for example by heavy braking, sudden
avoiding action or similar, and endanger the
occupants.<
Roof rack*
A special roof rack system is available as an
accessory for your BMW. Please observe the
directions contained in the installation instruc-
tions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located on the roof/on
the roof rails*.
Loading the roof rack
A loaded roof rack alters the car's road behav-
iour and steering response quite considerably,
by moving its centre of gravity.
When loading the roof rack, ensure that the
specified roof load limit, the car's gross weight
limit and the axle loads are not exceeded.
The relevant figures are shown in the Weights
section on page 222.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for raising
the glass roof and that no objects extend back
into the movement range of the luggage com-
partment lid/tailgate.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 126/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 127/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 128/258
D r i v i n g p r
e c a u t i o n s
126
see page 88. For the trailer, comply with the
manufacturer's specifications.
Run Flat Indicator
Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after a trailer
has been attached or detached, see page 88.
Outside mirrors
Two outside mirrors which bring both rear cor-
ners of the trailer into your field of view are
required by law. Mirrors of this kind can be
obtained from BMW Service as optional acces-
sories.
Electrical consumers
When towing a caravan, try to avoid operating
electrical equipment for too long at a time, in
order to limit the drain on the car's battery.
The power output of the trailer's rear lightsmust not exceed the following values:
Flashing turn indicators: 42 W each side
Tail lights: 60 W each side
Brake lights: 84 W total
Rear fog lights: 42 W total
Reversing lights: 42 W total
Before starting a journey, check that the
trailer's rear lights are operating correctly.
Driving without functioning rear lights could put
other road users at risk.<
Towing a trailer
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may
start to snake, depending on design and load.<
Counteracting snaking
If the trailer nevertheless begins to snake, the
outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard
immediately. Only attempt to steer out of thesituation if this is absolutely essential, and make
any steering movements as cautiously as pos-
sible and without endangering other road users.
Trailer Stability Control*
The system helps you to neutralise a trailer's
tendency to swing from side to side. It detects
snaking movements and promptly brakes the
vehicle so that road speeds fall to below the
critical range and the outfit is stabilised.
The system functions whenever a trailer is
towed and connected to the corresponding
power socket, at road speeds of at least approx.
65 km/h, approx. 40 mph.
If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no
trailer is attached, for example during use of a
bicycle carrier with lights, the system may
become active in extreme driving situations.
The system cannot intervene if the trailer veers
instantly, e.g. on slippery or loose road sur-
faces. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
tip over before any snaking motion is detected.
The system is not operational if DSC is deacti-
vated or malfunctioning, see page 85.
Gradients
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up
other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients
steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer. If a
supplementary permit for heavier trailer loads
has been obtained, the limit is 8Ξ, see
page 226.
Downhill gradients
Special care must be taken when descending
gradients, where a trailer is more susceptible to
snaking.Before starting to descend, always change
down to the next lower gear, if necessary as far
as first gear, and drive down the hill slowly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 129/258
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 130/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 131/258
NavigationThis chapter describes how you can ent
destinations and choose your route, so th
your navigation system guides you reliably
your destinatio
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 132/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 133/258
131
2. Press the controller.
Further menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired view of the route or
"Vehicle position".
4. Press the controller.
Displaying arrow view in map view
Professional navigation system:
When the navigation system proposes achange of direction, the arrow view is shown
briefly.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Navigation arrow pop-up display"
and press the controller.
The arrow view appears.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 134/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
132
Destination input
You can choose from the following options for
entering a destination:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination via voice com-
mands*, see page 136> Selecting a destination via Information, see
page 139
> Selecting a destination from a list, see Des-
tination list, page 141
> Selecting a destination from the address
book, see page 142
> Selecting home address, see page 144.
Once you have selected a destination, you are
ready to start route guidance, see page 147.
You can also store a navigation destination on a
favourites button/programmable memory key;
see page 19.
Only enter data when the car is standing
still, and always obey the actual traffic
regulations and road signs in the event of any
contradiction between the traffic situation and
the instructions given by the navigation system.
Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of
the passengers in your car and other road
users.<
Calling up navigation
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
Entering a destinationmanually
The wordmatch principle, see page 145, makes
the input of place-names and streets easier.
This makes it possible to enter different spell-
ings, and names are completed automatically
so that stored place-names and streets can be
called up quickly.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 135/258
133
controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press controller.
3. Select "Address input" and press the con-
troller.
In addition, the system supports you with the
following special features:
> If you do not enter a street name, you will be
guided to the centre of the town or city.
> You can skip input of the country, town or
city if you wish to retain previous inputs.
Selecting a country
1. Select "Country" or the country displayed
and press the controller.
The list of available countries is displayed.
2. Select your destination country and press
the controller.
With the Professional navigation system,
Europe can also be selected.
At least the town/city or its postcode must be
entered in order to start route guidance.
Entering a destination by town or city
name1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed and
press the controller.
2. Select the initial letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all places starting with that letter is
shown on the control display.
3. Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller.> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press and hold down the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 136/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
134
4. Enter more letters if necessary.
The list is gradually narrowed down with
every subsequent letter that you enter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the third field from the top. Turn the control-
ler until the town or city name is selected in
the list and press the controller.
Entering a destination by postcode
1. Select "City" or "City / Postcode" and press
the controller.
2. Enter postcode:
Select the individual characters and press
the controller each time.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press and hold down the con-
troller.
3. Select postcode and press the controller.
The name of the appropriate destination is
displayed.
4. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
destination is selected and press the con-
troller.
Entering street, house number and junction
After entering the street, you can add the junc-
tion or house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 137/258
135
Entering a street and junction
1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as
the town or city.
Enter the junction in the same way as the street.
Entering a street without entering atown/city
With the Professional navigation system:
You can also enter a street without entering a
town or city. In this case, all streets in the
entered country are offered. The respective
town or city is shown after the street name.
If a town or city has been entered already, this
entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in
instances where the desired street cannot be
found in the entered town or city because itbelongs to a different district, for example.
1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until a
request appears to enter a street within the
country, and press the controller.
3. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top and enter the street.
Entering a house number
You may enter any house number that is stored
on the navigation DVD for the street in question.
1. Select "Building number" and press the
controller.
2. To enter the house number:
Select the individual characters and press
the controller each time.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
house number is selected and press the
controller.
Business navigation system:If not all the house numbers in a street are
stored on the navigation DVD, a selection with
ranges of numbers is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 138/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
136
Starting route guidance from a manualdestination input
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Route guidance is started immediately.
> If you do not want to start route guidance
right away:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, see page 141.
Displaying information on thedestination
Business navigation system:
Select "Information" and press the controller.
For details on Information see page 139.
Entering a destination viavoice commands*
With the Professional navigation system you
can enter a desired destination via the voice
input system. During destination entry, it is pos-
sible at any time to switch between voice com-
mands and entries via iDrive; to do so, reacti-
vate the voice input system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud to you via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the centre console.
Selecting a country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice input system.
Entering destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling the destinationTo enter a destination, spell it in the manner in
which it is spelled in the destination country.
Say the letters fluently and at normal volume,
and avoid unnatural emphasis and pauses.
The system can propose up to 20 destina-tions that match your entries. Up to
2. {Address input}
2. Say the name of the destination coun-
try.
1. Spell the name of the town or city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more precisely the system will rec-
ognise the town or city.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 139/258
137
6 entries at a time are displayed on the con-
trol display.
The town or city can also be selected from the
list via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
input system is spoken can be entered as whole
words.
Example: to enter a town/city within Germany as
a whole word, the language of the system must
be German.
A prerequisite is the use of a suitable navigation
DVD.
Speak fluently and at normal volume, and avoidunnatural emphases and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to ask for the destina-
tion town/city.
The system can propose up to 6 destina-
tions that match your entries.
The town or city can also be selected from the
list via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination isselected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
summarised in a separate list and shown as a
town/city followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry using {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city in that list.<
Entering a street and house number
The street is entered in the same manner as thetown or city.
To enter the house number:
The system suggests a town or city.
2. Select a town or city:
> To select chosen town/city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries on the list:
{Next page}
> To spell the town/city again:
{Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system suggests a town or city.
3. Select a town or city:
> To select chosen town/city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To enter the town/city again:
{Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {Building number}
2. Say the house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 140/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
138
Starting route guidance
Route guidance is started immediately.
Storing a destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
Selecting a destination viamap
If you know only where a destination or road is
located, you can use a map to enter the destina-
tion. You can select the destination on the map
by means of cross-hairs and then transfer it for
route guidance.
With the Business navigation system, a naviga-
tion DVD of version 2007-1 or higher is required
to select a destination via map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press controller.
3. Select "Destination input map" and press
the controller.
A map section is displayed on the control
display:
> Around the current destination during
route guidance
> Around the last destination entered if
route guidance is switched off
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn controller.
> To move the map: move the controller in
the corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved left, right,
forward and back.
5. To incorporate the destination into route
guidance or to save it, press the controller.
The selected destination and further menu
items are displayed.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 141/258
139
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts route guid-
ance.
> "Show vehicle position" places your
car's position at the centre of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the centre of the
map.> "Proceed" switches back to "Destina-
tion input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press controller.
The map for destination input can also be called
up from the map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting a destination viaInformation
You can call up selected destinations, e.g.
hotels, tourist attractions or hospitals, and
transfer them for route guidance.
Professional navigation system
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
3. Select place or country:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "Other place"
4. Press controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels / restau-
rants", and press the controller.
6. If applicable, enter search criteria, e.g. max-
imum distance from current location.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 142/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
140
Destinations are displayed on the control
display.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of information and sym-
bols depends on the respective navi-
gation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina-tion list and start route guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display other destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Business navigation system
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
3. Select a town or city:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "Other place"
> "On country"
4. Press controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels / restau-
rants", and press the controller.
Destinations are displayed on the control
display. With "On destination", "Other
place" and "On country", the destinations
are sorted alphabetically; with "On location"
they are sorted according to distance.
6. If applicable, select letters and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 143/258
141
The list is narrowed down successively with
every additional letter that you enter.
7. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
8. Select a menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina-
tion list and start route guidance:
Select "Accept as destination" and
press the controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select "Place call" and press the con-
troller.
> To display the address and phone
number, select "Details" and press the
controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map view
If you have selected the category 'Hotels', for
example, and started the search, the hotels are
shown as symbols on the map.
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Hide icons" and press the control-
ler.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show icons" and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-
tem are shown in the destination list. You can
call up these destinations and incorporate them
into route guidance.
If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-
ple, you can save all the destinations you wish
to drive to in the destination list in advance, seeEntering a destination manually on page 132.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the
destination list.
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion during route guidance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 144/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
142
To show other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn controller.
Incorporating the destination intoroute guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing the destination list
1. Select the desired destination in the desti-
nation list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To save the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information about the desti-
nation:
Select "Info on destination".
> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". Route guidance will
be switched off.
> To change the entry:
Select "Change destination". Operating
principle, see Entering a destination by
town or city name, page 133.3. Press controller.
Address book
Calling up address book
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in the addressbook
You can save approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-troller.
3. Select "Enter address yourself" and press
the controller.
4. Enter a name and address, see also Enter-
ing a destination manually, page 132.
5. Select "Save address" and press the con-
troller.
The entry is saved in the address book.
You can also save a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, see page 141.
Storing current position*
Your current position can be transferred to the
address book.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 145/258
143
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
address" is selected and press the control-
ler.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be modified. Operating
principle, see Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 132.
4. Select "Save address" and press the con-
troller.
You can transfer your current position to the
address book even if you have left the area dig-
itised on the navigation DVD. To do this, you
have to enter a name.
Selecting destinations from addressbook
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries are displayed on the
control display.
2. Select an entry and press the controller.
To start route guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from addressbook
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select an entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit" and press the controller.
4. Change the entry.
Operating principle, see Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 132.
5. Select "Save address" and press the con-
troller.
Deleting destinations from addressbook individually
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.2. Select an entry and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 146/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
144
3. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
Deleting all destinations from addressbook
1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Saving home address
You can save your current position or the cur-
rent destination as your home address in the
address book. This entry appears in second
place in the address book.
Saving home address
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Home address" is selected and press the
controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" or
"Save current destination" during routeguidance and press the controller.
4. With the Professional navigation system:
Select "Save address" and press the con-
troller.
Accepting home address asdestination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit" and press the controller.
Operating principle, see Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 132.
Selecting route
You can influence the route calculated by
selecting various route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination input or during route guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is also taken into account, e.g.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 147/258
145
motorways or winding roads. The road types
are stored on the navigation DVD. For this rea-
son, the route proposed by the system will not
necessarily be the one the driver expects from
experience.
Altering route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route criteria" is selected and press the
controller.
The various criteria are listed on the control
display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "Use motorways"
Motorways and arterial roads are given
priority.> "Exclude motorways"
Motorways are avoided as far as possi-
ble.
> "Fast route"
The fast route, being a combination of
the shortest possible route and the fast-
est roads.
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be.
4. Press controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. Select additional criteria for the route as
appropriate, then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"*Automatic alteration of route in the event
of traffic congestion. Depending on the
class of road and the length of the
obstruction, the computed route mighttake you through the obstruction.
> "Exclude toll roads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Exclude ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Route criteria can also be changed in the arrow
or the map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
Wordmatch principle
The wordmatch principle makes the input of
place-names and streets easier. It compares
your destination inputs continuously with thedata stored on the navigation DVD, and reacts
immediately. This has the following advantages
for you:
> You can input place-names in a form that
may differ from the official version, provided
that the alternative entry is familiar in
another country or language.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 148/258
D e s t i n a
t i o n i n p u t
146
Example:
Instead of the English version "Munich" you
can input the German name "München" or
the Italian version "Monaco".
> When entering place-names or streets, the
system completes the name automatically
as soon as it has been identified beyond
doubt.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection and entry, that occur in names
stored on the navigation DVD. This makes it
impossible to enter incorrect names or
unknown addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 149/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 150/258
R o u t e
g u i d a n c e
148
2. Select "Stop guidance" or "Guidance" and
press the controller.
If you did not reach the destination before the
end of the last journey, the display at the start of
the next journey will show the inquiry:
"Continue guidance?".
Route guidance starts automatically after a brief
moment.
To start route guidance immediately:Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying the route
Depending on the equipment version, various
modes are available for displaying the course of
the route during route guidance.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last shown, see
Convenient call-up of menu items onpage 15.<
Displaying arrow view
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow view" is selected and press the con-
troller.
The arrow view is displayed.
1 Switching voice messaging on/off
2 Calling up traffic information* manually
3 Selecting route criteria
4 Starting/ending route guidance
5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
6 Distance to the next change of direction
7 Current position
8 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Route guidance on the calculated route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow points to the calculated route as
the crow flies if the vehicle is in an area
not recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g.
in a multi-storey car park.
Business navigation system:
Arrow points to the destination as the
crow flies if the navigation DVD has been
ejected and the route could not be cal-
culated.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, the expected time of arrival and the dis-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 151/258
149
tance to the destination are displayed in the top
or bottom line of the control display.
The arrows appear in a different fashion before
a change of direction.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position shown on a
map. After starting route guidance, the planned
route is shown on the map.
With the Business navigation system, the map
view can be displayed when the navigation DVD
is in the drive.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
desired map view is selected:
> "Map north-oriented"
> "Map, indicating dir. of travel"
> Professional navigation system:
"Perspective"
3. Press controller.
Professional navigation system
1 Switching voice messaging on/off
2 Starting/ending route guidance
3 Selecting destination via map
4 Displaying the menu in which the last
selected information can be displayed/hid-
den, see Selecting a destination via Infor-mation, page 139
5 Changing map view
> "Map north-oriented"
> "Map, indicating dir. of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Altering route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information* manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The expected time of arrival and the distance to
the destination will be displayed in the bottom
line of the control display.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the scale is smaller than 500 km or 250 miles,
you can choose whether to align the map point-
ing towards north, in the direction of travel, or in
perspective. At scales from 500 km or
250 miles upward, the map is always displayed
pointing towards north.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 152/258
R o u t e
g u i d a n c e
150
Business navigation system
1 Switching voice messaging on/off
2 Starting/ending route guidance
3 Selecting destination via map
4 Displaying the menu in which the last
selected information can be displayed/hid-
den, see Selecting a destination via Infor-
mation, page 139
5 Changing map view
> "Map north-oriented"
> "Map, indicating dir. of travel"
6 Altering route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information* manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The expected time of arrival and the distance to
the destination will be displayed in the bottom
line of the control display.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the scale is smaller than 500 km or 250 miles,
you can choose whether to align the map point-
ing towards north or in the direction of travel. At
scales from 500 km or 250 miles upward, the
map is always displayed pointing towards north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map view will be displayed.
Changing the scale
Turn the controller to change the scale.
Displaying roads and places along theroute
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during route guidance.
The distances to be covered along each section
of the route are likewise displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route list" is selected and press the con-
troller.
Congestion warnings are also displayed; with
the Professional navigation system directional
arrows are displayed as well.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Route guidance by voicemessages
Switching voice messaging on/off
During route guidance, voice messages can be
switched on or off in the arrow view or the map
view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 153/258
151
To switch the voice messages on or off at any
time:
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Voice output of nav. system" and
press the controller.
Voice messaging is switched on.
Repeating and cancelling voicemessages
You can also make the following adjustments
with the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel, see page 48:
> To have a voice message repeated:
Press the button.
>To switch voice messaging on/off:Press button for longer.
> With the Business navigation system, to
switch off voice messages during an
announcement:
Press the button.
Adjusting the volume of the voicemessages
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
message is being issued.
1. If necessary, have the last voice message
repeated.
2. Turn the knob during the voice message
until the desired volume is obtained.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio and video sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing the route
Changing the course of a route
Business navigation system:
During route guidance, you can specify up to
two points by which the route should pass, e.g.
places or motorway intersections. These points
are predetermined by the navigation system
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 154/258
R o u t e
g u i d a n c e
152
and depend on the length of the route, among
other factors.
Specifying a point
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route via" is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. Select the point, e.g. Munich, and press the
controller.
4. Select "Calculate" and press the controller.
The new route is calculated.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Deleting the specified points
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route via" is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. In the second field from the top, select
"Route via" and press the controller.
4. Select "Calculate" and press the controller.
The points are no longer specified for the route.
Avoiding sections of a route
During route guidance, you can also instruct the
navigation system to detour around sections of
the route. You do this by specifying after howmany kilometres of the original route you wish
to return to it.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
route for" is selected and press the control-
ler.
A particular section of the route can be
avoided:
> With the Professional navigation sys-
tem, throughout the entire route
> With the Business navigation system, for
up to 50 km or 50 miles
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 155/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 156/258
R o u t e
g u i d a n c e
154
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic information
settings" is selected and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Traffic information" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select a TMC station and press the control-
ler.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the TMC
station with the strongest received signal.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last shown, see
Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 15.<
Filtering traffic information
Business navigation system:
You can filter which traffic information the sys-
tem is to display:1. Call up start menu.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Traffic information settings" and
press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Show / Hide info types" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select the type of traffic information and
press the controller.
Traffic information can be received and dis-
played.
Calling up traffic information manually
During route guidance
During route guidance, traffic information can
be switched on or off in the arrow view or the
map view.
If the symbol appears outlined in red, traffic
information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During route guidance, traffic information items
along the planned route will be marked bymeans of triangles with red borders.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 157/258
155
While route guidance is switched off
1. Call up start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic information" and press the
controller.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information symbols
Traffic event at map scale larger than
10 km or 5 miles, arrow points inaffected direction of travel
A number of traffic situations are
pending. Enlarge the scale to view
each of these individually.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
Unspecified traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Oncoming vehicle
Height restriction
No parking
Fog
Intense rainfall
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Risk of congestion
Stop-and-go traffic
Congestion
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Narrow road
Delay
Traffic check
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 158/258
R o u t e
g u i d a n c e
156
Representation of traffic information inthe map view
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 200 km or
100 miles.
Professional navigation system:
At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional
information is displayed. The length, directionand effect of a traffic obstruction are shown by
means of arrows along the route, e.g.:
Business navigation system:
At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional
information is displayed. The length and effect
of a traffic obstruction are indicated by means
of triangles along the route. The start of the traf-
fic obstruction is indicated by the symbol for the
particular kind of traffic obstruction.
Along the planned route
Symbol with red border enclosing the traffic
obstruction symbol.
Outside of the planned route
> Map scale up to 10 km or 5 miles:
Symbol with grey border enclosing the traf-
fic obstruction symbol
> Map scale from 20 km or 10 miles:
Symbol with grey border
Traffic information during routeguidance
System behaviour varies, depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, see
page 145.
Displaying traffic obstructions
If the navigation system receives information on
a traffic obstruction and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, then within approx. 100 km or
50 miles of the obstruction you are provided
with specific information such as the length of
the congestion.
The last possible turnoff will be shown to you
shortly before you will reach it.
Professional navigation system:
Select "Plan detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system calculates a new route
to avoid the traffic jam.
Business navigation system:
Select "Dynamic route planning" and press the
controller.
The navigation system calculates a route
depending on road type as well as the type and
length of the traffic obstruction. The route may
lead through the obstruction or avoid the traffic
congestion.
This information is also displayed if you have
called up another application on the control dis-
play.
Not displaying traffic obstructions
If "Dynamic route" is selected, the route is
changed automatically in the event of traffic
obstructions. The system does not indicate
traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on the class of road and the length
Slowly moving traffic
Stop-and-go traffic
Congestion
Traffic event in both directions
(yellow) Slowly moving traffic
(yellow) Stop-and-go traffic
(red) Congestion
(red) Danger
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 159/258
157
of the obstruction, the computed route might
take you through the obstruction.
Displaying vehicle position*
You can also have your car's current position
displayed when the route guidance is switched
off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until "Vehi-
cle position" is selected and press the con-
troller.
The present position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
name for your present position, the degrees
longitude and latitude are displayed.
To exit the menu:Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, see page 149.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 160/258
W h a t t o d o i f . . .
158
What to do if ...
What to do if ...
> the prompt to insert a navigation DVD is dis-
played, even though there is one in the
drive?
The navigation DVD might not be the cor-
rect DVD for the navigation system. The
DVD is labelled correspondingly.
> you call up your car's current position, but
the display is not accurate?
You are in a poor-reception area or in an
area not covered by the navigation DVD, or
the system is currently calculating your
position. Reception will normally be possi-
ble outdoors.
> a destination is not transferred to the route
guidance system?
The data for the destination is not available
on the navigation DVD currently in use.
Choose a destination as close as possible
to the original one.
> a destination without a street is not trans-
ferred to the route guidance system?
No city centre can be determined on the
navigation DVD for the place specified.
Enter any street or a specific destination for
the town or city in question, e.g. the trainstation, then start route guidance.
> you wish to input a destination, but the cor-
rect letters of the alphabet cannot be
selected?
The data for the destination is not available
on the navigation DVD currently in use. In
this case the system will not offer the letters
for selection. Choose a destination as close
as possible to the original one.
> directions for turning cease to be givenimmediately before junctions during route
guidance?
You are driving in an area for which full dig-
ital information is not yet available on the
navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicat-
ing a turn, you will see an arrow which indi-
cates the general direction of your planned
route. Or you have deviated from the pro-
posed route and the system requires a few
seconds to calculate a new route.
> the navigation system refuses to respond to
inputs?
If the car battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes after reconnection for the
system to regain full operational status.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 161/258
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 162/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 163/258
EntertainmenThis chapter tells you how to operate the rad
CD and external audio device and how to adju
the tone settings for these system
Entertainmen
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 164/258
O n / o f f a n
d s e t t i n g s
162
On/off and settings
The following audio and video sources share
the same controls and adjustment features:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer*> TV*
Controls
The audio and video sources can be operated
via:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9
> Favourites buttons/programmable memory
keys, see page 19
Buttons on CD player
Specification with one disc drive
1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/
off, volume
> Press: to switch on/off.
When switched on, the radio station last
tuned or the CD track last played is
called up.
> Turn: to adjust the volume.
2 CD eject
3 Drive for audio CD and navigation DVD
4 Station/track search
> To change radio stations.
> To select tracks for CD player and CD
changer.
Specification with two disc drives
1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/
off, volume
> Press: to switch on/off.
When switched on, the radio station last
tuned or the CD track last played is
called up.
> Turn: to adjust the volume.
2 Drive for audio CD
3 CD eject
4 Station/track search
> To change radio stations.
> To select tracks for CD player and CD
changer.
> To change a TV channel.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 165/258
163
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
There is a choice of:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "DAB": radio reception of digital stations*
> "CD": CD player or changer
> "Audio AUX": AUX-IN port, USB/audio
interface
> "TV": television reception
> "Set": depending on the audio source in
question, further settings can be made, e.g.
for the radio: switch traffic reports* on/off,
update stations with the strongest received
signal, store stations, tone settings, sample
stations.
From another menu, you can changedirectly to the screen last shown, see
Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 15.<
As of radio readiness, the selected audio source
is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
To switch audio output for entertainment sys-
tems on/off:Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the control display indi-
cates that audio output has been switched off.
In vehicles equipped with a single disc drive,
audio output remains available for approxi-
mately 20 minutes after the ignition has been
switched off.
All you have to do is switch audio output back
on.
Adjusting the volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons onthe steering wheel, see page 9.
As of radio readiness, the setting is saved for
the remote control currently in use.
Adjusting the volume for trafficreports*
Turn knob 1 during a traffic report until the
desired volume is obtained.
This volume is retained for subsequent traffic
reports. If other audio or video sources are setlouder than the traffic reports, the volume of a
report is increased correspondingly.
Tone settings
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
As of radio readiness, the settings are saved for
the remote control currently in use.
Altering tone settings
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 166/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 167/258
165
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theatre".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 room acoustics is switched on.
To switch off the room acoustics effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Equaliser*
You can adjust individual audio frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Equaliser" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is obtained.
Resetting the tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. Call up start menu.2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Reset" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Specification with two disc drives:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 168/258
R a d i o
166
Radio
Your radio is designed to receive the following
stations:
> FM: stations in the VHF waveband
> AM: stations in the LW*, MW and SW*
wavebands> DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see
page 171
Listening to the radio
Press the knob if audio output is switched off.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press controller.
Stations are shown on the control display
according to a variety of selection criteria, e.g.
"All stations".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, update the stations with the
strongest received signal, see page 167.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on CD player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The next station displayed will be called up.
You can also change the stations with buttons
on the steering wheel, see page 9.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations for a different selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose between the following selec-
tion criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the waveband "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest receivedsignals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Memorised stations":
Stations that you have previously stored,
see page 168.
> "Manual frequency selection":
Setting stations that can be received in
addition to those displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 169/258
167
To change the selection criterion:
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Choose the selection criterion and press
the controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are auto-
matically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press controller.
Further menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To stop sampling:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.Station sampling is interrupted and the
selected station is retained.
Buttons on CD player
To sample stations, press and hold
down the button for the corresponding direc-
tion.
To stop Scan, press the button again.
Manual frequency selection
With "Manual frequency selection" you can
select stations that can be received in addition
to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual frequency selection" and
press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to select a particular fre-
quency.
Updating stations with strongestreceived signals
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originallyreceived, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals in the AM
waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 170/258
R a d i o
168
4. Press controller.
Further menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of stations with the strongest
received signals is updated. The frequencies of
the stations are displayed.
Memorising stationsVia iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top. Turn the controller until
the desired selection criterion is selected
and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press controller.
Further menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Save" and press the controller.
"Memorised stations" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
7. Press controller.
The station is now memorised.
The stations for the last selection criterion are
displayed again after a short time.
As of radio readiness, the stations are saved for
the remote control currently in use.
Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys
You can also store a station on a favourites but-
ton/programmable memory key; see also
page 19.
1. Select the station.
2. ... Press desired button for
longer.
Changing memory location
1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the
controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 171/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 172/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 173/258
171
Digital radio DAB
Digital radio provides you with additional sta-
tions that are transmitted with a high sound
quality.
Several stations are combined to form an
ensemble. Up to 15 stations are broadcast
within an ensemble.
Each station may transmit additional informa-
tion such as weather reports or the name of the
artist performing the current music track.
Some stations feature additional programmes;
e.g. sports stations can broadcast various
sports events simultaneously. In such cases
you have the option of choosing a particular
sports event.
A digital radio network must be available inorder to receive digital stations.
Listening to digital radio
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
You will hear the station last selected.
The Control Display shows the stations and var-
ious ensembles, if applicable.
1 Ensembles
2 Stations of the selected ensemble
Changing stations
1. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to select an ensemble. Select the ensembleand press the controller.
2. Turn the controller.
To change stations via buttons on the CD
player:
Press the button next to the CD
player or the button on the steering wheel for
the corresponding direction.
The next station displayed will be called up.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 174/258
D i g i t a l r a d i o D A B
172
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can display stations for a different selection
criterion.
> "Memorised stations"
Up to 12 stations that have been previously
saved.
Memorising stations, see page 173.
> "Autostore"
Up to 12 automatically stored ensembles,
see Updating receivable stations. Up to
15 stations are displayed for each ensem-
ble.
> "Manual frequency selection"
An ensemble and its stations are displayed.
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
Updating receivable stations
Once you leave the transmission ranges of pre-
viously received stations, you can update the
display of receivable stations.
1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
3. Press controller.
4. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of receivable stations is updated.
Up to 12 ensembles can be shown.
If "No Signal" appears on the left-hand side of
the control display, no station can currently be
received.
To update the stations when reception is possi-
ble again:
Press controller.
Displaying additional information
If offered by a particular station, additional infor-
mation can be displayed, such as weather
reports or the name of the artist performing the
current music track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 175/258
173
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling stations, Scan
All stations in the current ensemble are sam-
pled in succession.
Select "Manual frequency selection" to sample
the stations of all ensembles.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To stop sampling:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected sta-
tion is retained.
Buttons on CD player:
To start, press the button on the CD
player or the button on the steering wheel in the
corresponding direction for an extended period.
To stop, press the button again.
Manual station selection
1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2. Select "Manual frequency selection" and
press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to select an ensemble:
Select "Next" or "Previous" and press the
controller.
4. Select the station.
Memorising stations
You can store 12 stations.
1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2. Select "Autostore" or "Manual frequency
selection" and press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to select an ensemble.4. Select the desired station and press the
controller.
5. Select "Save" and press the controller.
"Memorised stations" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
7. Press controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 176/258
D i g i t a l r a d i o D A B
174
The station is now memorised.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing memory location
1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the
controller.
2. Select the desired station and press thecontroller.
3. Select "Save" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
5. Press controller.
The station is now memorised.
Selecting a frequency band*
Some digital stations are transmitted regionally,others also nationally.
For more information on frequency bands, con-
tact BMW Service.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "DAB" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Frequency selection" and press the
controller.
7. To select a frequency band:
> "Band III + L" for regional and national
stations
> "Band L" for regional stations
> "Band III" for national stations
8. Press controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Automatic changeover
You can program whether the radio automati-
cally switches to the analogue frequency of a
station when the latter cannot be received dig-
itally.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 177/258
175
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "DAB" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Automatic FM changeover" and
press the controller.
The reception is automatically switched to
the analogue frequency.
Once the digital frequency is received again,
the radio switches back to digital reception.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
If no analogue frequency is available for a digital
station, the reception is switched off.
Listening to additionalprogrammes
* This symbol is shown if a selected station
offers additional programmes. Sports stations,
for example, may broadcast various sports
events at the same time. You then have the
option of choosing a particular sports event.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select the "xyz" additional program and
press the controller.
You will hear the selected programme.
The name of the programme appears in the sta-
tus line.
Once the programme is over, the radio switches
back to the selected station.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 178/258
C D
p l a y e r a n d C D c h a n g e r
176
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Specification with two disc drives:
The upper disc drive is intended for audio CDs.
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files known as
MP3s can be played by the CD player or CD
changer.
Removing navigation DVD
Specification with one disc drive:
The navigation DVD can be removed during
route guidance. All the data required for the
respective route guidance procedure is held in
the navigation system's buffer memory. This
enables you to listen to audio CDs during route
guidance. A message appears on the control
display if new data from the navigation DVD is
required.
Button on CD player:
To eject the navigation DVD, press the
button.
The navigation DVD is ejected part way out of
the drive.
Starting CD player
Insert the CD into the drive with the label side
up.
The CD is pulled in automatically. The CD starts
to play automatically if audio output is switched
on. When playing CDs with compressed audio
files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute
to read in the data, depending on the directory
structure.
To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for principle see page 14.1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. On cars with a
CD changer, select "CD" and press thecontroller to start the CD player.
The CD starts to play if audio output is switched
on.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 179/258
177
Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys
You can store the CD player function on a
favourites button/programmable memory key
from which to start the CD player; see page 19.
Starting CD changer
Load and insert the CD magazine, see
page 180.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select thedesired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is
selected and played.
If the CDs in the magazine have been changed,
the lowermost CD starts to play, e.g. CD 1,
track 1.
The control display indicates how many CDs
are in the magazine.
Via favourites buttons/programmable
memory keys
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on a favourites button/programmable
memory key from which to start the CD
changer; see page 19.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD player
Press the button for the appropriate
direction repeatedly until the desired track is
reached.
The track is displayed on the control display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, see page 9.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press
the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 180/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 181/258
179
Compressed audio files*
1. Select current track and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Scan directory" and
press the controller.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD,select "Scan all" and press the control-
ler.
To stop sampling:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Repeating tracks
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Further menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To stop the repeat function:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select current track and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the chosen track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Repeat directory" and
press the controller.
To stop the repeat function:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 182/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 183/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 184/258
C D
p l a y e r a n d C D c h a n g e r
182
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs
being impossible to play, or only playable with
restrictions.
General care
Whenever necessary, use a commercially avail-
able cleaning cloth to wipe the reflective signal
side of CDs/DVDs in straight motions from the
centre outwards. For more information on how
to take care of CDs/DVDs, see booklet Looking
after your car.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 185/258
183
AUX-IN port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Fold the centre armrest upwards.
Connection for audio playback:
Jack plug, 3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the
controller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys
You can store the "Audio AUX" function on a
favourites button/programmable memory key;
to start audio playback, see page 19.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 186/258
U S B / a u d i o
i n t e r f a c e
184
USB/audio interface
You can connect audio devices to the USB/
audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device
(MP3 player, USB memory stick). These can be
operated using iDrive.
The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC as well as playlists in the M3U
format can be played.
The large number of audio devices available on
the market means it cannot be ensured that
every audio device can be operated via the vehi-
cle.
Ask your BMW Service which audio devices are
suitable.
ConnectingFold the centre armrest upwards.
1 Connection for audio playback:
Jack plug, 3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on the equipment version,
your vehicle is equipped with a storage
pouch to store your audio device. It is located
under the centre armrest.<
iPod
For audio playback over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the iPod to connections 1 and
2.
Use an iPod adapter cable to connect the iPod.
The menu structure of the iPod is supported by
the USB/audio interface.
USB device
Connect using the supplied flexible
adapter cable. This protects the USB
interface and your USB device against mechan-
ical damage.<
For audio playback over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the USB device to connection
2.
After you connect for the first time, the informa-
tion on all tracks (e.g. artist, music style) as well
as the playlists of the USB device are trans-
ferred to the vehicle. This operation can take
some time. How long it takes depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During the transfer, you can select the tracks on
the basis of the directories and file names.
After the transfer, you can call up the tracks on
the basis of the information and playlists.
The information from up to four USB devices
can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx.
20,000 tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected, the track
information stored in the vehicle from the first
USB device is deleted.
Tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, this is
displayed.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 187/258
185
until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the
controller.
4. Select "USB audio" or the name of the
audio device and press the controller.
5. Playback starts with the first track.
Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys
You can store the "USB audio" function on a
favourites button/programmable memory key;to start audio playback, see page 19.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks on the basis of the
information and playlists. In the case of USB
devices, you can also call up the tracks using
the file directory.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information on the track
You can have any saved information about the
current track displayed, e.g. the name of the art-
ist.
1. Press the controller while the TV is on.2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 188/258
U S B / a u d i o
i n t e r f a c e
186
Repeating tracks
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
To stop the repeat function:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-troller.
Random play
You can play the tracks of the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of one artist.
1. Select current track and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To stop the random play order:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD
player:
Press and hold the button for theappropriate direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, see operating instruc-
tions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio
device can be damaged, thus reducing driving
safety while the vehicle is being driven.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, per-
fect playback cannot be ensured in every case.
Information regarding connection
> The USB/audio interface supplies the con-
nected audio devices with current if the
audio device supports this. For this reason,
do not connect the USB audio device to a
socket in the vehicle during operation.
> Do not force the connector into the USB
interface.
> Do not connect any devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB/audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 189/258
187
TV
Starting a channel
Press the knob if audio output is switched off.
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "TV" and press the controller.
The device selects the channel last seen.
For your own safety, the TV picture is only
on when the vehicle is moving at a speed
of less than 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph.
In certain national-market versions, the TV pic-
ture is only visible when the handbrake is
applied.<
To switch to another audio source:
Move the controller forwards while the TV is on.
Channels
The TV system is equipped with a digital-capa-ble receiver*. If you are driving through areas
where both analogue and digital television is
broadcast, both types of television can be
received. You can switch between these types.
Changing the channel
1. Press controller.
The channels are shown on the left-hand
side.
2. Select the desired channel and press thecontroller.
You can also change the channel by turning the
controller while the programme is on.
In addition, the channel can be changed with
buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 190/258
T V
188
Updating display of receivablechannels
Once you have left the transmission range of a
received channel, you can update the display of
the receivable channels.
1. Press the controller while the TV is on.
2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the channels with the strongest
received signal is updated.
Adjusting the picture*
Adjusting brightness and contrast
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "TV" and press
the controller to start the programme.
4. While the programme is playing, press the
controller twice.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Video" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is obtained.
Resetting settings
Select "Reset" and press the controller.
Changing the standard
TV standards vary among countries. However,you can adjust your TV receiver to accommo-
date all common TV standards.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "TV" and press
the controller to start the programme.
4. While the programme is playing, press the
controller twice.
5. Select "Video" and press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select "TV
standard" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 191/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 192/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 193/258
MobilityTo assist you in preserving your car's mobilit
this section contains important information o
operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenan
and minor repai
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 194/258
R e f u e l l i n g
192
Refuelling
Tank cap
Opening
1. Open fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the tank cap counter-clockwise.
3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap.
Closing
Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is
clearly heard to click into place.
Do not pinch the strap attached to the
cap. Otherwise, fuel vapours could
escape.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can unlock the
fuel filler flap manually:
Saloon
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand trim
panel of the luggage area.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Touring
1. Fold up the luggage area floor panel.
2. Remove the cover from the right-hand trim
panel of the luggage area. To do so, turn the
screws, arrows 1, a quarter turn and take
out the cover, arrow 2.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 195/258
193
Note when refuelling
When handling fuel, comply with
the safety regulations displayed by
garages and filling stations.<
When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle dur-
ing refuelling, otherwise
>the supply of fuel will be cut off prematurely
> fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less
effectively
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts
out for the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
If the remaining operating range is below
50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to
add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
not assured and damage may occur.<
Petrol engine
Approx. 63 litres, approx. 13.9 Imp. gal., includ-
ing a reserve of approx. 8 litres, approx. 1.8 Imp.
gal.
Diesel engine
Approx. 61 litres, approx. 13.4 Imp. gal., includ-
ing a reserve of approx. 6.5 litres, approx.
1.4 Imp. gal.
Fuel grade
Petrol engine
Never use fuel containing lead, as other-
wise the catalytic converter will be perma-
nently damaged.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85% ethanol, nor with flex fuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be
sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as
possible. Since the engine has a knock control
function, it can run on different grades of fuel.
> Super Plus/premium plus fuel, octane
number 98 RON.
Fill up with fuel of this grade so that the
nominal performance values are achieved.
> You can also run the engine on:
Premium-grade unleaded fuel, octane
number 95 RON.
This fuel is also sold under the following
designations:
DIN EN 228 or Eurosuper.
> The minimum permissible grade is:
Regular-grade unleaded fuel, octane
number 91 RON.
335i: premium-grade unleaded fuel, octane
number 95 RON.
Do not fill the tank with any petrol below
the specified minimum grade. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged.<
National-market specification forleaded fuel*
This specification enables you to run the car on
leaded petrol, in addition to the fuel grades
listed above. The minimum approved grade is
91 RON.
Diesel engine
Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME,
biodiesel or petrol. If the wrong type of
fuel has been added, do not start the engine,
otherwise you risk causing damage to it.<
Contact BMW Service if the wrong type of fuel
has been added.
> Your BMW's engine is rated to run on:
Diesel oil to DIN EN 590 standard.
The filler neck is designed for refuelling at
diesel pumps.<
Winter-grade diesel
To ensure that the diesel engine operates relia-bly during the cold season of the year, it must
be run on winter-grade diesel oil, which garages
usually sell during the period in question. Fuel
filter heating is installed as standard equipment
to prevent the fuel from solidifying during oper-
ation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 196/258
R e f u e l l i n g
194
Do not incorporate any additives, includ-
ing petrol, as these could cause damage
to the engine.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 197/258
195
Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressures
Information for your safety
The condition of the tyres and maintenance of
the correct tyre pressures not only influencetyre life but are also decisive factors in road
safety and ride quality.
Checking pressures
Check the tyre pressures regularly: at
least twice a month and before setting out
on any long journey. Incorrect tyre pressures
can adversely affect the car's roadholding and
cause tyre damage, which could result in an
accident.<
Tyre pressure values
The tyre pressures for the approved tyre sizes
are visible on the driver's door post when the
driver's door is open.
If you do not see any tyre pressures listed for
your tyres' speed code letter, observe the tyre
pressures for the corresponding size, e.g.
255/45 R 17.
After correcting tyre pressures, reinitial-
ise the Run Flat Indicator, see page 88.<
Tyre pressures for trailer towing
For trailer towing, the tyre pressures specified
for higher load apply.
Tyre size
These tyre pressures apply to sizes of tyre
approved by BMW and makes of tyre recom-
mended by BMW; details are available from
BMW Service.
Condition of tyres
Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres-
ence of foreign bodies, unusual wear and suffi-
cient tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tyre tread depth should not be allowed to
drop below 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in. Below a treaddepth of 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in, there is an
increased risk of aquaplaning when driving on
wet roads at fairly high speeds.
Below a tread depth of 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in,
winter tyres become noticeably less suitable for
winter driving conditions. New tyres should be
fitted in the interest of safety.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tyre's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tyre's flanks identify tyres that incorporatethese wear indicators. Once the tyre tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tread
depth remaining is 1.6 mm, approx. 1/16 in.
Tyre damage
Unusual vibration while the car is being driven
could indicate a tyre fault or some other defect
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 198/258
W h e e l s
a n d t y r e s
196
on your car. This may have been caused e.g. by
driving over a kerb or similar. The same applies
to any other abnormal road behaviour, such as
pulling severely to the right or left.
In such cases, reduce speed immediately
and have the wheels and tyres checked
without delay. Proceed with caution to the near-
est BMW Service or specialist tyre dealer that
operates to BMW specifications and has suita-bly trained personnel. Have the car towed there
if necessary.
Tyre damage represents a risk of serious injury
to the car's occupants and to all other road
users.<
Age of tyres
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tyre replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless ofthe actual wear of the tyres.
A tyre's date of manufacture is included in the
inscription on the tyre:
DOT ... 0705 means that the tyre was manufac-
tured in week 07 of 2005.
Run-flat tyres
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is the cir-
cle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tyres comprise a conditionally self-
supporting tyre and a special rim. The rein-
forcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tyre
can continue to be used subject to certain
restrictions, even if depressurised.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre, page 89.
New wheels and tyres
Have new wheels and tyres fitted only by
BMW Service or by a specialist tyre dealer
that operates to BMW specifications and has
suitably trained personnel. If such work is per-
formed inexpertly, it could result in consequen-
tial damage and thus constitute a safety risk.
Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tyres
BMW advises against the use of
retreaded tyres, as these could adversely
affect the car's safety. Their carcasses may dif-
fer in internal construction or have aged suffi-
ciently to limit their durability.<
Correct wheels and tyres
When fitting new tyres or changing over from
summer to winter tyres and vice versa, fit run-
flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a
flat, no spare wheel is available. BMW Service
will be glad to advise you on this.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that damaged run-flat tyres be replaced
rather than repaired.<
BMW recommends fitting only wheels
and tyres that it has approved for your
type of vehicle, otherwise the tyres may e.g.
make contact with the vehicle body due to
impermissible tolerances, even though they are
of an approved size; this could result in a serious
accident. BMW is unable to assess the suitabil-
ity of wheels and tyres it has not approved and
cannot therefore guarantee their safety.<
Details of the correct wheel/tyre combinations
can be obtained from BMW Service.
The correct wheel and tyre combination also
has an influence on various systems, the func-
tion of which could otherwise be adversely
affected, for instance ABS, DSC or RPA.
To maintain the car's good road behaviour,
always fit tyres of the same make and tread pat-
tern to all wheels. After a tyre has been dam-
aged, fit the original wheel and tyre combination
again as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 199/258
197
Recommended makes of tyre
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by
BMW for each tyre size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tyre.
When properly used, these tyres meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tyres
BMW recommends you to fit winter tyres if the
car is used for driving in wintry conditions.
Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking
have better winter characteristics than summer
tyres, they do not normally match the perform-
ance of winter tyres.
Note the speed limit applicable to thesetyres
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tyres fitted to your car; failure to do
so could result in tyre damage and accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted
must be displayed in your field of view. Special-
ist tyre dealers and BMW Service can supply
these labels.
Tyre storageStore wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and prefer-
ably dark place when not in use. Protect tyres
against contamination from oil, grease and fuel.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. BMW Service is able to provide
details.
Fit snow chains in pairs and only to the rear
wheels. When fitting, comply with the snow
chain manufacturer's instructions. When snow
chains are in use, do not exceed 50 km/h or
30 mph.
Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator if
snow chains are fitted, as the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see
page 86.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 200/258
I n t h e e n g i n e c o m
p a r t m e n t
198
In the engine compartment
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by BMW Service or by a workshop that
operates to BMW specifications and has suita-bly trained personnel. If such work is performed
inexpertly, it could result in consequential dam-
age and thus constitute a safety risk.<
Engine compartment lid
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windscreen
before you open the engine compartment lid.<
Press the release lever and open the lid.
Closing
Close the engine compartment lid from a height
of about 40 cm, approx. 16 in, with some
momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
area of the engine compartment lid isunobstructed.
If you notice during the journey that the engine
compartment lid has not been properly closed,
stop the car at the earliest possible moment and
close it correctly.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 201/258
199
Important accessories in the engine compartment
1 Petrol engine: coolant expansion tank, see
page 202
Diesel engine: the expansion tank is on the
opposite side of the vehicle
2 Vehicle Identification Number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight
cleaning system and windscreen washer,
see page 61
4 Jump-starting connection, see page 214
5 Engine oil filler cap, see Adding engine oil
6 Diesel engine: dipstick for engine oil, see
Engine oil level
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption varies depending on
driving style and operating conditions.
Diesel engine: checking engine oil level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. after
driving continuously for at least 10 km or
6.5 miles.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. After about 5 minutes pull out the dipstick 6
and wipe it dry with a non-linting cloth,
paper towel or similar.
4. Carefully push the dipstick fully into its tube,
then pull it out again.
The oil level must be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
The quantity of oil between the two dipstick
marks is approx. 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 202/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 203/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 204/258
I n t h e e n g i n e c o m
p a r t m e n t
202
BMW regularly approves specific grades of
engine oil.
BMW Service can provide details of the
oils currently approved by BMW for your
car.<
Do not use any oil additives, as they could
lead to engine damage under some cir-
cumstances.<
Alternative oil grades
If exceptionally none of these oils is available,
you can top up small quantities in between oil
changes with other grades of oil. The oil speci-
fication on the container must be one of the fol-
lowing:
Petrol engines
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-01 FE or BMW Longlife-04
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-98, or
ACEA A3
Diesel engines
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-04
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-98 or ACEA A3/B4
Coolant
Do not open up the cooling system while
the engine is hot, otherwise you may
scald yourself on the escaping coolant steam.<
Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. BMW Service can provide
details of which additives are suitable.
Use only suitable additives, otherwise the
engine could suffer damage. The addi-
tives are injurious to health.<
When disposing of coolant additives,
comply with the relevant environmental
protection laws.<
Checking coolant level
1. Allow the engine to cool down.
2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly
anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then
allow the pressure to escape before open-
ing it fully.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in thefiller neck, see also diagram next to the filler
neck.
4. If necessary, slowly top up to correct level
but do not overfill.
5. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to
click into place.
6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as
soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 205/258
203
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System contributes
towards upholding the roadworthiness and
operating reliability of your BMW. Its purpose is
to optimise maintenance measures with a view
to minimising the cost of looking after your car.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and advanced algorithms take account
of the varying conditions in which your BMW is
used. Condition Based Service uses these to
determine current and future servicing require-
ments. The system provides you with an oppor-
tunity to tailor the scope of maintenance work
to your personal standards, so that your BMW
will always be reliably operational.
On the control display, you can have the
remaining distances and times for selected
maintenance tasks as well as any legally pre-
scribed dates displayed to you individually, see
page 75:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Statutory vehicle inspections, depending
on national requirements
> Diesel particle filter*
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously saves service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-trol unit, and propose an optimised mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, see page 79, otherwise the effec-
tiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not
assured.<
Service Booklet
More information on items that need regular
maintenance and on the scope of maintenance
required can be found in the Service Booklet.
BMW recommends that you have mainte-
nance and repair work carried out by
BMW Service.
Make sure that maintenance work is confirmed
in the Service Booklet after it has been carried
out. These entries are evidence that your vehi-
cle has been serviced regularly and correctly.<
Socket for on-boarddiagnosis OBD
Components which have a decisive effect on
exhaust emissions can be tested via the OBD
socket with a suitable device.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 206/258
M a
i n t e n a n c e
204
This on-board diagnosis socket is on the
driver's side, on the underside of the instrument
panel to the left, behind a cover.
Exhaust emissions
The warning light flashes:
Engine malfunction that can damage
the catalytic converter. Have the vehicle
checked without delay.The warning light lights up:
Exhaust emissions have deteriorated. Have the
car checked as soon as possible.
Recycling
Your vehicle was designed in such a way that
the production and choice of materials are con-
ducive to recycling at a later point in time.
BMW recommends returning your vehicle at
the end of its service life to a recycling point
specified by the BMW Group. In this manner,
you can actively contribute to protecting the
environment and its resources. Vehicle recy-
cling is subject to the respective national regu-
lations. You can obtain more information in the
Internet under www.bmw.com or from your
BMW Service.
General care
Useful hints on care of your BMW are provided
in the booklet Looking after your car.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 207/258
205
Replacing parts
Toolkit
Saloon
The toolkit is stored in a compartment on the
right-hand side of the luggage area. Remove
the cover.
Touring
The toolkit is in a storage compartment on the
left-hand side of the luggage area underneath
the floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook
on the bottom, see arrow.
3. Swing the wiper blade upwards.
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
the windscreen, see arrow.
In order to avoid damage, make sure that
the wiper arms are against the wind-
screen before you open the engine compart-
ment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 208/258
R e p l a
c i n g p a r t s
206
Touring: changing rear wiper blade
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Pull off the wiper blade, see arrow.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it audibly engages.
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs are important elements in
terms of your driving safety. They should,
therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recom-
mends that any bulb-related routines that you
are not familiar with or that are not described
here be entrusted to BMW Service.
Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with
the fingers, because even slight amounts
of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb
and reduce its working life. Use a clean tissue,
cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<A box containing spare bulbs is available from
BMW Service.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch. Otherwise, burns could
result.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, as otherwise short-circuits
could result. Observe any instructions supplied
by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk ofinjury or damage when changing bulbs.<
Please see the booklet Looking after your car
for notes on care of the headlights.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
BMW Service or a workshop that operates to
BMW specifications and has suitably trained
personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Controls, displays and other equipment items
inside your car have light-emitting diodes
behind a cover as their light source. These
LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are
classified by law as Class 1 light-emittingdiodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours at a time, as this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Xenon headlights*
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon headlight fails
nonetheless, switch on the fog lights and con-tinue the journey with great care, provided that
local legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon headlight
system, including bulb replacement, car-
ried out only by BMW Service or a workshop
adhering to BMW specifications and employing
skilled personnel. Work that is improperly car-
ried out could otherwise result in a risk of fatal
injury due to high voltage.<
Side and parking lights
In the event of a fault, please contact BMW
Service or a workshop that operates to BMW
specifications and has suitably trained person-
nel.
Halogen headlights
H7 bulb, 55 watts
The H7 bulb is pressurised, so wear gog-
gles and gloves. There is otherwise a riskof injury if the bulb is damaged.<
One of two halogen headlight versions is
installed in your vehicle. They primarily differ in
their covers. There are separate headlight cov-
ers for low-beam headlights and high-beam
headlights.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 209/258
207
Take care when installing the covers, as
otherwise leaks could occur and cause
damage to the headlight system.<
Access to the bulbs, version 1
The high beam headlight can be accessed from
the engine compartment, whereas the low-
beam headlight is accessed through a flap in
the wheel well.
1 Cover for high-beam headlight
2 Cover for low-beam headlight
3 Turn indicator holder
To remove the covers:
1. Fold the respective wire bracket to the side,
see arrows.
2. Flip the cover upwards and take it out of the
guide.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit
the covers.
Access to the bulbs, version 2
The high beam headlight can be accessed from
the engine compartment, whereas the low-
beam headlight is accessed through a flap in
the wheel well.
1 Cover for high-beam headlight
2 Cover for low-beam headlight
3 Turn indicator holder
To remove the covers:
> High-beam headlight: press the catch,
arrow 4, and take the cover out of the guide.
> Low-beam headlight: unscrew and remove
the cover, arrow 5.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit
the covers.
Access through the wheel well
Only for low-beam headlights and turn indica-
tors:
1. Turn the wheel inwards.
2. Open the flap in the wheel well. To do so,
use a coin, for example, to turn the fastener
anti-clockwise.
Replacing the low-beam headlight andhigh-beam headlight, version 1
1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-
light.
2. Disconnect the plug from the light.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 210/258
R e p l a
c i n g p a r t s
208
3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the
mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,
arrow 2.
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb as shown in the detail of
the illustration above.
6. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.
7. Connect the plug.
8. Reattach the cover.
Replacing the low-beam headlight andhigh-beam headlight, version 2
1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-
light.
2. Push the bulb at the plug upwards against
the holder, see arrow, and pull it backwards
to remove.
3. Disconnect the plug from the light.
4. Connect the plug to the new bulb.
5. Insert the bulb into the holder at the top and
push it forwards to engage.
6. Reattach the cover.
Side and parking lights
5 watt bulb, W5W
1. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-
light.
2. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow.
3. Pull out the bulb and change it.
4. Insert the bulb holder.
5. Reattach the cover.
Front turn indicators
21 watt bulb, PY21W
or PY21W Silver Vision
1. Open the flap in the wheel well, see Access
through the wheel well on page 207.
2. Turn the turn-indicator holder 1 to the left
and remove.
3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it.
4. Insert the turn-indicator holder 1.
5. Attach the flap to the wheel well.
Rear lights
Saloon
> Rear fog light:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lights:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 211/258
209
The rear lights are divided into two parts. One
part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other
is in the side section.
1 Brake light
2 Parking/tail light
3 Flashing turn indicator
4 Reversing light
5 Tail light
6 Rear fog light*
Touring
> Rear fog light:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lights:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
The rear lights are divided into two parts. One
part is in the tailgate, the other is in the side sec-
tion.
1 Brake light
2 Parking/tail light
3 Flashing turn indicator
4 Reversing light
5 Tail light
6 Rear fog light*
Lights in the side section
Saloon
1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the
luggage area or release the turn-lock fas-
tener by turning it counter-clockwise and
remove the cover.
2. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,
and pull out.
3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the luggage area.
Touring
1. Left-hand lights:
Open the flap on the left-hand side of the
luggage area.
Right-hand lights:
Open the luggage area floor panel. Turn the
screws on the cover, arrows 1, a quarter
turn and take out the cover, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 212/258
R e p l a
c i n g p a r t s
210
2. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,
and pull out.
3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the luggage area.
Lights in the luggage compartment lid/tailgate
Saloon
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
luggage compartment lid using a screw-
driver and remove the trim.
2. Unfasten the bulb holder with clip, see
arrow, and remove.
3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart-
ment lid.
Touring
1. Press out one side of the cover at the clips
using a screwdriver, see arrows, and fold
the cover downward.
2. Fold back the foam insulating material.
3. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,
and remove.
4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it.
5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
6. Reattach the trim of the tailgate.
Licence plate lights
C5W bulb, 5 watts
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 213/258
211
1. Using a screwdriver, push the light to the
right in the flap of the light housing.
2. Take out the light towards the left and
change the bulb.
3. Insert the light.
Centre brake light
This light uses LED technology. In the event of a
fault, please contact BMW Service or a work-shop that operates to BMW specifications and
has suitably trained personnel.
Changing a wheel
Your BMW is fitted with run-flat tyres as stand-
ard. This dispenses with the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
If you need to continue driving with a damaged
tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre on page 89.
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, see Run-
flat tyres, page 196.
When fitting new tyres or changing over from
summer to winter tyres and vice versa, fit run-
flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a
flat, no spare wheel is available. BMW Service
will be glad to advise you on this. See also New
wheels and tyres, page 196.
The tools for changing wheels are availa-
ble as optional accessories from BMW
Service.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Thief-proof wheel studs*
1 Wheel stud for adapter
2 Adapter, in toolkit
Removing
1. Take the adapter 2 out of the toolkit andinsert it into the wheel stud.
2. Unscrew wheel stud 1.
After reattaching the wheel stud, remove the
adapter again.
The code number is embossed on the face of
the adapter. Please note down this number and
keep the note in a safe place for the event of the
adapter being lost.
Car battery
Maintenance
The battery needs no routine maintenance
whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid
it contains will normally last for the full operating
life of the battery in temperate climates. BMW
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 214/258
R e p l a
c i n g p a r t s
212
Service will gladly advise you on all matters
relating to batteries.
Recharging the battery
Recharge the battery only with the engine
stopped, via the connections in the engine
compartment. Connections, see Jump-starting
on page 214.
Disposal
After changing the battery, have the old
one disposed of by BMW Service or take
it to an official collecting point. Batteries filled
with acid should be transported and stored
upright. Protect batteries against falling over
when in transit.<
Power failure
After a temporary power failure, the functions ofcertain equipment items may be restricted and
require reinitialising. Likewise, individual set-
tings may have been lost and need to be repro-
grammed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, see
page 78.
> Radio
Stations may need to be memorised again,
see page 168.> Navigation system
Operability must be awaited, see page 130.
> Glass roof
Under some circumstances, the roof can be
raised only. The system must be initialised.
Please contact your BMW Service.
> Panorama glass roof
Under some circumstances, the roof can be
raised only. The system must be initialised.
Please contact your BMW Service.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be memorised again,
see page 45.
> Inside mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, see
page 107.
Fuses
Do not repair blown fuses or replace them
with fuses of different colours or ampere
ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires
can cause a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove box and remove.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
set in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 215/258
213
Mutual aid
Emergency call*
Prerequisites for an emergency call:
> Equipment with Business mobile phone
provision. This equipment specification
permits you to make an emergency call
even if a mobile phone has not been regis-
tered with the car.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The mobile phone network is received.
> The emergency call system is functional.
Although the emergency number may differ
from country to country, it is still possible to ini-
tiate an emergency call within most GSM net-
works using the button.It is a punishable offence to misuse the emer-
gency call system.
Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.
2. Press the SOS button for at least
2 seconds.
The LED in the button comes on. As soon as a
telephone connection with the general emer-
gency call centre has been established, theLED flashes.
When a cancellation inquiry appears on the
control display, you can cancel the emergency
call within 5 seconds.
If the situation permits, wait in the car until voice
contact has been established. You can then
provide detailed information about your situa-
tion.
In vehicles equipped with an activated BMW
Assist, a telephone connection with the BMW
Assist emergency call centre is established. Ifthe car's current position can be determined,
this information is transmitted to the emer-
gency call centre.
If the LED is flashing but the emergency call
centre cannot be heard over the hands-free
system, it is possible that the hands-free sys-
tem is malfunctioning. The emergency call cen-
tre may still be able to hear you, however.
If certain requirements are met, an emergency
call is automatically initiated after a seriousaccident. The automatic emergency call will not
be hindered by pressing the button.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
function cannot be ensured in certain
unfavourable conditions.<
Ending an emergency call
Press the button on the steering wheel, see
page 8.
Mobile Service
The BMW Group's Mobile Service (Emergency
Service) is there to assist you round the clock in
the event of a breakdown, including on week-
ends and public holidays.
The telephone numbers for Mobile Service in
your home country are in the Contact booklet.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or Tele-
Service you can establish contact with theBMW Group's Mobile Service for breakdown
assistance directly via iDrive, see separate
Operating Instructions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 216/258
M u t u a l a i d
214
First-aid pouch*
Certain items in the first-aid pouch have a lim-
ited useful life. Check the expiry dates of the
contents regularly and replace any items that
have expired.
Saloon
The first-aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the luggage area in a storage compart-ment.
Touring
The first-aid pouch is behind the cover on the
left-hand side of the luggage area.
Warning triangle*
Saloon
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the luggage area. Press the tab to take it
out.
Touring
The warning triangle is behind the cover on the
left-hand side of the luggage area. Press the tab
to take it out.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by using two jump leads
from another vehicle's battery. In the same way,
you can help to start another car. Use only leads
with fully insulated terminal clamps.
Do not touch any electrically live partswhen the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Do not depart from the proce-
dure described below, otherwise personal
injury could result or one or both vehicles be
damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 217/258
215
Preparations
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approx-
imately the same capacitance in Amp/h.
This information is on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
The bodies of the two vehicles must notmake contact, otherwise there is the risk
of a short-circuit.<
Connecting the jump leads
Connect the jump leads in the correct
order to avoid sparks that could cause
injury.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, see also Engine com-partment overview on page 199. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+
jump lead to the positive battery terminal or
a jump-starting connection on the donor
vehicle.
3. Connect the second terminal clamp on the
positive/+ jump lead to the positive battery
terminal or a jump-starting connection on
the vehicle to be started.
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–
jump lead to the negative battery terminal or
the engine or body earth connection on the
donor vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut to act as the
body earth or negative terminal.
5. Connect the second terminal clamp on the
negative/– jump lead to the negative battery
terminal or a ground/earth connection on
the engine or body of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at a slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
customary way.
If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,
wait several minutes until the flat battery
has been recharged to a slightly greater
degree.
3. Allow the engines to run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite
order from that in which they were originally
attached.
If necessary, check the battery and have it
recharged.
Do not use any spray products sold as
starting aids.<
Tow-starting, towing awayUsing the towing eye
The screw-in towing eye must always be car-
ried on the car. It can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 218/258
M u t u a l a i d
216
Saloon: it is stored in the toolkit underneath the
cover on the right-hand side of the luggage
area, see page 205.
Touring: it is stored in the toolkit underneath
the cover on the left-hand side of the luggage
area, see page 205.
Use only the towing eye supplied with the
car, and make sure that it is screwed in
fully and is tight. Only use the towing eye for
towing on roads. Avoid lateral loads on the tow-
ing eye, e.g. do not raise the car at the towing
eye. Otherwise, the towing eye and the vehicle
could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover in bumper:
Press on the upper corners of the cover.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
see page 55, as otherwise low-beam
headlights, rear lights, turn indicators and wind-
screen wipers would not be available.
If the electrical system fails, do not attempt to
tow-start or tow away the car. The electrical
steering-wheel lock cannot be disengaged and
the car is not steerable. Jump-starting, see
page 214.
Servo assistance is not available when the
engine is not running. The steering and brakes
will require extra effort to operate. Active steer-
ing is not active and more extensive steering
wheel movements will be required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-
ing on local regulations.
Manual gearbox
Gearshift lever in idle position.
Automatic gearbox
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever positions, see page 58.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 70 km/h
or 40 mph and a towing distance of
150 km or 90 miles, otherwise the automatic
gearbox could be damaged.<
Towing methods
In some countries, it is prohibited to tow
another vehicle on public roads by means of a
towbar or towrope.
Familiarise yourself with the relevant legislation
in the country in question.
With towbar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on
the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attach-
ing the towbar at an angle, note the following:
> Towbar clearance may be restricted when
cornering.> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Only attach the towbar to the towing
eyes. Attaching the towbar to other parts
of the vehicle can result in damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 219/258
217
With towrope
Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing
vehicle moves off.
For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as
these will help avoid sudden tensile loads.
Only attach the towrope to the towing eyes.
Attaching the towrope to other parts of the
vehicle can result in damage.<
With breakdown truck: vehicle withoutxDrive
Have the BMW transported by a breakdown
truck with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a
loading platform.
Do not raise the car at the towing eye or
by body or suspension components, oth-
erwise it could be damaged.<
With breakdown truck: vehicle withxDrive
Do not tow the BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise the
wheels can lock up and the transfer box can be
damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a loading plat-
form only.
Tow-starting
If possible, you should use jump leads instead
of tow-starting to start the engine, see
page 214. On cars with catalytic converters,
tow-starting should only be used if the engine is
cold; on cars with automatic gearbox, it is not
possible to tow-start the engine.
If the car's electrical system fails, do not
attempt a tow start, otherwise you will not
be able to release the electrical steering wheel
lock and steer the car.<
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
complying with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.
3. Engage 3rd gear.
4. Keep the clutch depressed while tow-start-
ing the car, then gradually release the
clutch. Press the clutch down fully again assoon as the engine has started.
5. Halt in a suitable place, remove the towbar
or towrope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent
Control HDC when tow-starting the vehi-
cle, page 87.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 220/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 221/258
ReferenceThis section contains technical data, the sho
commands for the voice input system, and t
index, which is your quickest way of finding t
information you wa
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 222/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
220
Technical data
Dimensions
Saloon
All dimensions in mm. Smallest turning circle ∆: 11.0 m, 36 ft 1 in; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38 ft 9 in.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 223/258
221
Touring
All dimensions in mm. Smallest turning circle ∆: 11.0 m, 36 ft 1 in; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38 ft 9 in.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 224/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
222
Weights
Saloon
318i 320i
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1435
(3164)
1435
(3164)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1465
(3230)
1465
(3230)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1880
(4145)
1880
(4145)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1910
(4211)
1910
(4211)
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
895
(1973)
895
(1973)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1050
(2315)
1050
(2315)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1505
(3318)
1615
(3560)
1555
(3428)
1655
(3649)
1610
(3549)
1720
(3792)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1535
(3384)
1635
(3605)
1570
(3461)
1670
(3682)
1625
(3582)
1735
(3825)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1950
(4299)
2060
(4541)
2000
(4409)
2100
(4630)
2055
(4530)
2165
(4773)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1980
(4365)
2080
(4586)
2015
(4442)
2115
(4663)
2070
(4563)
2180
(4806)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 225/258
223
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
935
(2061)
1020
(2249)
950
(2094)
1035
(2282)
995
(2194)
1090
(2403)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1080
(2381)
1095
(2414)
1100
(2425)
1110
(2447)
1110
(2447)
1135
(2502)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
450
(15.9)
450
(15.9)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1505
(3318)
1505
(3318)
1600
(3527)
1610
(3549)
1710
(3770)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 1520
(3351)
1610
(3549)
1625
(3582)
1725
(3803)
1655
(3649)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1950
(4299)
1950
(4299)
2045
(4508)
2055
(4530)
2155
(4751)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 1965
(4332)
2055
(4530)
2070
(4563)
2170
(4784)
2100
(4630)
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
925
(2039)
925
(2039)
985
(2172)
995
(2194)
1085
(2392)
1015
(2238)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1080
(2381)
1080
(2381)
1105
(2436)
1110
(2447)
1125
(2480)
1120
(2469)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
460
(16.2)
450
(15.9)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 226/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
224
Touring
318i 320i
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1505
(3318)
1505
(3318)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1535
(3384)
1535
(3384)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1970
(4343)
1970
(4343)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
2000
(4409)
2000
(4409)
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
900
(1984)
900
(1984)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1135
(2502)
1135
(2502)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1565
(3450)
1715
(3781)
1605
(3538)
1715
(3781)
1690
(3726)
1790
(3946)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1595
(3516)
1735
(3825)
1630
(3593)
1735
(3825)
1705
(3759)
1805
(3979)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
2030
(4475)
2180
(4806)
2080
(4586)
2180
(4806)
2155
(4751)
2255
(4971)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
2060
(4541)
2200
(4850)
2095
(4619)
2200
(4850)
2170
(4784)
2270
(5004)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 227/258
225
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
935
(2061)
1040
(2293)
955
(2105)
1045
(2304)
1005
(2216)
1090
(2403)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1160
(2557)
1180
(2601)
1175
(2590)
1190
(2623)
1190
(2623)
1200
(2646)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
450 –
1375
(15.9 –
48.5)
450 –
1375
(15.9 –
48.5)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1580
(3483)
1580
(3483)
1665
(3671)
1675
(3693)
1775
(3913)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 1595
(3516)
1675
(3693)
1690
(3726)
1790
(3946)
1720
(3792)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
2045
(4508)
2045
(4508)
2130
(4696)
2140
(4718)
2240
(4938)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 2060
(4541)
2140
(4718)
2155
(4751)
2255
(4971)
2185
(4817)
Front axle load limit kg
(lb)
940
(2072)
940
(2072)
990
(2183)
1000
(2205)
1085
(2392)
1020
(2249)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1160
(2557)
1160
(2557)
1190
(2623)
1200
(2646)
1200
(2646)
1200
(2646)
Roof load kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Luggage area capacity
acc. to VDA test
litres
(cu ft)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
460 –
1385
(16.2 –
48.9)
450 –
1375
(15.9 –
48.5)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 228/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
226
Towing a trailer
Saloon
318i 320i
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
unbraked kg
(lb)
695
(1532)
695
(1532)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1250
(2756)
1400
(3086)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1400
(3086)
1500
(3307)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1165
(2568)
1165
(2568)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1955
(4310)
1955
(4310)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1985
(4376)
1985
(4376)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
unbraked kg
(lb)
745
(1642)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1700
(3748)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1700
(3748)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 229/258
227
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1195
(2634)
1210
(2668)
1215
(2679)
1225
(2701)
1225
(2701)
1250
(2756)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
2025
(4464)
2135
(4707)
2075
(4575)
2175
(4795)
2130
(4696)
2240
(4938)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
2055
(4530)
2155
(4751)
2090
(4608)
2190
(4828)
2145
(4729)
2255
(4971)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
unbraked kg
(lb)
745
(1642)
745
(1642)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
–
>Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)– 1600
(3527)1800
(3968)1800
(3968)1800
(3968)1800
(3968)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Rear axle load limit kg(lb)
1195(2634)
1195(2634)
1220(2690)
1225(2701)
1240(2734)
1255(2767)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
2025
(4464)
2025
(4464)
2120
(4674)
2130
(4696)
2230
(4916)
–
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
– 2040
(4497)
2130
(4696)
2145
(4729)
2245
(4949)
2175
(4795)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 230/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
228
Touring
318i 320i
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
unbraked kg
(lb)
735
(1620)
750
(1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1250
(2756)
1400
(3086)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1400
(3086)
1500
(3307)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb)
1250
(2756)
1250
(2756)
Permitted gross weight
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
2045
(4508)
2045
(4508)
> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
2075
(4575)
2075
(4575)
325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
unbraked kg
(lb)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1700
(3748)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)> Automatic gearbox kg
(lb)
1600
(3527)
1700
(3748)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ
> Manual gearbox kg
(lb)
1700
(3748)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
1800
(3968)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 231/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 232/258
T e c h
n i c a l d a t a
230
Filling capacities
Litres
(Imp. units)
Note
Fuel tank Fuel grade: page 193
> Petrol engine approx. 63
(13.9 gal)
> Diesel engine approx. 61(13.4 gal)
including a reserve of
> Petrol engine approx. 8
(1.8 gal)
> Diesel engine approx. 6.5
(1.4 gal)
Window washer system Further details: page 62
including headlight washers approx. 6
(10.6 pt)
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 233/258
231
Short commands for the voice inputsystem
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions directly, irrespective of which menu
item is selected. Here you will find important
short commands for the voice input system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
Calling up assistance window 18 {Assistance window}
Selecting display in the assistance window 19 {Assistance window map north orientated},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow view},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window vehicle position},
{Assistance window journey computer} or
{Assistance window computer}
Changing scale in the assistance window 150 {Assistance window scale ... kilometres} or
{Assistance window scale ... metres}
Function Command
For more information, see the separate Operating Instructions.
Calling up BMW Assist {BMW Assist}
"BMW Service", calling up services {BMW Service}
Calling up BMW Contact {BMW Contact}
Calling up "BMW Contact Numbers" {BMW Contact Numbers}
Calling up Information Plus {Info Service}
Calling up "Nearest BMW dealer" {Nearest BMW dealer}
Calling up My Info {My Info}
Calling up BMW Online {BMW Online}
Calling up telephone {Telephone}
Dialling phone number {Dial number}
Displaying phone book {A to Z}
Dialling from the phone book {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
Displaying "Top 8" {Top 8}
Redialling {Last number redial}
Displaying "Calls accepted" {Calls accepted}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 234/258
S h o r t c
o m m a n d s f o r t h e v o i c e i n p
u t s y s t e m
232
Navigation
On-board information
Displaying "Calls not accepted" {Calls not accepted}
Displaying "Bluetooth" {Bluetooth}
Calling up "BMW Mobile Service" {BMW Mobile Service}
Function Command
Function Command
Calling up navigation 132 {Navigation}
Displaying present position {Vehicle position}
Calling up "Address input" {Address input}
Calling up "New destination" {New destination}
Displaying "Destination input map" {Destination input map}
Displaying address book {From address book}
Displaying destination list {Destination list}
Switching on route guidance {Start guidance}
Switching off route guidance {Guidance off }
Displaying route criteria {Route criteria}
Switching on voice messages {Navigation info on}
Switching off voice messages {Navigation info off }
Repeating voice messages {Repeat navigation info}
Displaying arrow view {Arrow view}
Displaying map view {Map},
{Map north oriented},
{Map indicating direction of travel} or{Perspective}
Calling up route {Route menu}
Calling up "New route for" {New route for}
Changing the scale {Scale ... kilometres} or
{Scale ... metres}
Displaying roads or places along the route {Route list}
Calling up traffic information {Traffic information}
Calling up "TMC" {TMC}
Function Command
Calling up "On-board Info" 72 {On-board info}
Displaying computer 72 {Computer}
Displaying journey computer 73 {Journey computer}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 235/258
233
Entertainment
Calling up limit speed 82 {Limit}
Calling up stopwatch 82 {Stopwatch}
Activating speed limit 82 {Limit on}
Deactivating speed limit 82 {Limit off }
Function Command
Function Command
Tone settings 163 {Tone}
Switching on radio 166 {Radio on} or
{FM} or
{AM}
Calling up "FM" 166 {FM menu}
Calling up "AM" 166 {AM menu}
Calling up "All stations" 166 {FM all stations}
Selecting radio stations 166 {Station...} e.g. {Station BBC} or{Select station}
Calling up "Memorised stations" 166 {FM memorised stations},
{SW memorised},
{MW memorised} or
{LW memorised}
Selecting a memorised radio station 168 {Memorised station ...}
e.g. {Memorised station 1}
Calling up "Manual frequency selection" 167 {FM manual frequency selection},
{SW manual},
{MW manual},
{LW manual} or
{Select frequency} or
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
Calling up radio stations with strongest received
signal 167
{SW autostore},
{MW autostore} or
{LW autostore}
Switching on digital radio 171 {Digital radio}
Calling up menu for digital radio 171 {Digital radio menu}
Calling up "Memorised stations" on the digitalradio 172
{Digital radio memorised stations}
Calling up "Manual frequency selection" on the
digital radio 173
{Digital radio manual frequency selection}
Calling up "Autostore" on the digital radio 172 {Digital radio Autostore}
Calling up "TP" 169 {TP}
Switching on traffic reports 170 {Traffic reports on}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 236/258
S h o r t c
o m m a n d s f o r t h e v o i c e i n p
u t s y s t e m
234
Climate
menu
Switching off traffic reports 170 {Traffic reports off }
Calling up CD player 176 {CD menu}
Switching on CD player 176 {CD}
Calling up CD changer 176 {CD changer menu}
Switching on CD changer 176 {CD changer}
Selecting CD in CD changer 176 {CD 1...6}Selecting track 177 {CD track ...}
Selecting CD and track in CD changer 177 {CD 1...6 track ...}
Calling up DVD 176 {DVD drive menu}
Switching on DVD 176 {DVD drive}
Selecting DVD track {DVD drive track ...}
Selecting track 177 {Track ...}
Calling up TV 187 {Television Menu}
Switching on television 187 {Television}Adjusting the picture 188 {Picture}
Starting audio output for external audio
device 183
{Audio Aux}
Function Command
Function Command
Calling up "Air distribution" 99 {Air distribution}
Calling up "Automatic programs" 100 {Automatic programmes}
Function Command
Calling up menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 19 {Display off }
Calling up "Info sources" {Info sources}
Calling up "Door locks" 27, 30 {Door locks}
Calling up "Settings" {Settings}
Calling up "Steering wheel buttons" 48 {Steering wheel buttons}
Calling up "Light" 60, 93 {Light}
Calling up "Service" 75 {BMW Service}
Calling up "Service requirements" 76 {Service requirements}
Displaying "Check Control messages" 81 {Check Control messages}
Adjusting brightness of control display 83 {Brightness}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 237/258
235
Calling up "Units" 75 {Units}
Calling up "Languages" 83, 150 {Languages}
Calling up "Clock" 78 {Clock}
Calling up "Date" 79 {Date}
Calling up "Flat Tyre Monitor" 88 {RPA}
Calling up "PDC" 85 {PDC}Calling up "Traffic information settings" 154 {Traffic information settings}
Function Command
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 238/258
F r o m A t o Z
236
From A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies texts on the
control display for selecting
functions and refers you to
the page where these texts
are to be found.
A
ABS Anti-lock Brake
System 85
ACC, see Active Cruise
Control 65
"Accept as
destination" 140, 141"Accept current speed" 82
Accessories, see Your
individual vehicle 5
Accident, see Making an
emergency call 213
Activated charcoal filter for
automatic air-conditioning
system 102
Active Cruise Control 65
– indicator lights 67
– malfunction 68– selecting distance 66
– sensor 68
Active steering 90
– warning light 90
Adaptive Head Light 94
Additives
– coolant 202
– engine oil 201
"Address book" in
navigation 142Address for navigation
– deleting 143
– entering 132, 142
– memorising 142
– selecting 143
– storing current position 142
"Address input" 133
"Add to destination
list" 136, 138
Adjusting the interior
temperature, see Automatic
air conditioning 99
Adjusting the tone for audio
mode, see Tone
settings 163
Adjusting thigh support 42
Adjusting units of measure on
the control display 75
AHL, see Adaptive Head
Light 94
Airbags 90– deactivating 50
– indicator/warning light 91
– indicator light for front
passenger airbags 51
– reactivating 50
– safe seated position 41
Airbag switch, see Keyswitch
for front passenger
airbags 50
"Air circulation on / off" 49
Air conditioning mode– automatic air
conditioning 99
– ventilation 101
"Air distribution" 99
Air distribution
– automatic 100
– individual 99
Air flow rate 100
Air outlets 98
Air pressure, see Tyrepressures 195
Air recirculation, see
Recirculated-air mode 100
Air supply
– automatic air
conditioning 99
– ventilation 101
Alarm system 33
– avoiding false alarms 34
– interior movement
detector 34
– switching off alarm 33
– tilt alarm sensor 34
All-season tyres, see Winter
tyres 197
"All stations" displaying on
radio 166
All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 87
"AM", waveband 163, 166,
172, 173
Ambient air, see Recirculated-air mode 100
Anti-freeze
– coolant 202
– washer fluid 61
Anti-lock Brake System
ABS 85
Anti-theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 33
Approved engine oils 201
Aquaplaning 121
Armrest, see Centrearmrest 109
Arrival time, see Computer 72
Arrival time, see Starting route
guidance 147
Arrow view for navigation 148
"Arrow view" in
navigation 148
Ashtray
– front 110
– rear 111Assist, see separate
Operating Instructions
Assistance systems, see
Driving stability control
systems 85
Assistance window 18
– see iDrive 18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 239/258
237
AUC Automatic Air
Recirculation Control 100
Audio 162
– controls 162
– switching on/off 162
– tone settings 163
– volume 163
"Audio AUX" 163, 183, 184
– AUX-IN port 183– USB/audio interface 184
Audio device, external 109
Automatic
– air distribution 100
– air flow control 100
– channel memory 188
– cruise control 62, 63, 65
– driving lights control 92
– memorising of stations 167
Automatic air-conditioning
system 98– automatic air
distribution 100
– settings via iDrive 99
Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC 100
Automatic-dim mirrors 48
"Automatic FM
changeover" 175
Automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 57
– interlock 58
– overriding selector-lever
lock 59
– shiftlock, see Changing
selector lever positions 58
Automatic high beams and
low beams, see High-Beam
Assistant 95
Automatic low-beam
headlights, see High-Beam
Assistant 95"Automatic off" 46
"Automatic programs" with
automatic air-conditioning
system 100
Automatic station
search 167, 173
AUTO program for automatic
air-conditioning system 100
"Autostore"
– for radio 168
– for TV 188
"Autostore", digital radio 172
Auxiliary heater, see
Independent heating
system 102
AUX-IN
– port 109AUX-IN port 183
Average fuel consumption 72
– adjusting units 75
Average speed 72
Avoiding a congestion 156
Avoiding false alarms 34
Avoiding motorways in
navigation 145
Axle load limits, see
Weights 222
B
Backrest contour, see Lumbar
support 43
Backrests, see Seat
adjustment 42
Backrest width adjustment 43
Back seats
– see Rear seats 44
Balance, tone setting 164
"Band III" 174
"Band III + L" 174
"Band L" 174
Bar, see Towing methods 216
Bass, see Tone settings 164
Bass, see Treble and
Bass 164
Battery 211
– disposal 36, 212
– jump-starting 214
– recharging 212– remote control 26
– temporary power failure 212
Battery change
– remote control 36
– remote control for car 36
Battery change, remote
control for independent
ventilation/heating
system 104
Being towed 216
Belts, see Seat belts 46
Belt tensioner, see Seat
belts 46
Biodiesel, see Dieselengine 193
Blower, see Air flow
control 100
Bluetooth, see separate
Operating Instructions
BMW Assist, see separate
Operating Instructions
BMW homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 203
BMW Online, see separateOperating Instructions
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, see Drinks
holders 110
Brake assist, see Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 86
Brake discs 122
– brakes 120
– running in 120
Brake fluid, see Next Service
indicator 75
Brake lights
– bulb changing 209
– two-stage 90
Brake pads 120
– running in 120
Brakes 120
– ABS 85
– BMW Maintenance
System 203
– handbrake 57– Next Service indicator 75
– running in 120
Brakes, see Safe braking 121
Brake system
– BMW Maintenance
System 203
– disc brakes 122
– running in 120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 240/258
F r o m A t o Z
238
Breakdown Service, see
Mobile Service 213
Bridging, see Jump-
starting 214
"Brightness" for TV 188
"Brightness" in control
display 83
Brightness of the control
display 83"Building number" in
destination input 135
Bulb changing, see Lights and
bulbs 206
Button for starting the engine,
see Start/stop button 55
Buttons on the steering
wheel 9
C
Calling up e-mails, see BMW
Online, separate Operating
Instructions
Can holders, see Drinks
holders 110
Capacity
– fuel tank, see Filling
capacities 230
– luggage area, see
Weights 222
Car
– battery 211
– care, see booklet Looking
after your car
– laying up out of use, see
booklet Looking after your
car
– loads 122
– stopping 56
– washing, see booklet
Looking after your car– weight 222
Car's position, see Displaying
present position 157
Caravan-towing, see Towing a
trailer 124
Car care, see booklet Looking
after your car
Care, see booklet Looking
after your car
Care products, see booklet
Looking after your car
Car jack 211
Car key, see Integrated key/
remote control 26
Carpet care, see booklet
Looking after your carCar phone
– installed position, see
Centre armrest 109
– see separate Operating
Instructions
Car radio, see Radio 166
Car wash, see booklet
Looking after your car
Car washes 122
– see booklet Looking after
your car– with convenient access 35
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 120
CBS Condition Based
Service 203
"CD" 163, 176
CD changer 176
– compressed audio files 176
– controls 162
– fast forward, reverse 180
– installed position 180
– random play 179
– repeating track 179
– sampling tracks 178
– selecting CDs 177
– selecting track 177
– switching on/off 162
– tone settings 163
– volume 163
CD player 176
– compressed audio files 176
– controls 162
– fast forward, reverse 180
– random play 179
– repeating track 179
– sampling tracks 178
– selecting track 177
– switching on/off 162– tone settings 163
– volume 163
"Central locking" 28
Central locking 27
– convenient access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Centre armrest 109
Centre brake light
– bulb changing 211
Centre console, see Aroundthe centre console 12
Changing a wheel 211
Changing bulbs, see Lights
and bulbs 206
Changing the country for
TV 188
Changing the TV
standard 188
Chassis number, see Engine
compartment 199
Check Control 80
"Check Control
messages" 82
Child restraint systems 50
Child safety 50
Child safety catches 54
Child seat mountings,
ISOFIX 52
Child seats, see Child
safety 50
Chrome parts, care, seebooklet Looking after your
car
Cigarette lighter, see
Lighter 110
"City" in destination input 133
Cleaning, see booklet Looking
after your car
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 241/258
239
Cleaning headlights 61
– washer fluid 62
Cleaning the windows 60
– capacity, reservoir 230
– rear window 61
– washer fluid 62
– washer fluid reservoir 62
– washer jets 61
Clearance warning, see ParkDistance Control PDC 84
"Climate" 99
Climatic comfort
windscreen 121
"Clock" 79
Clock 70
– 12 hour/24 hour mode 79
– setting time 78
"Clock / Date" 78, 79, 80
Clutch, running in 120
Coat hooks 109Cockpit 8
Cold start, see Starting the
engine 56
Combined instrument, see
Instrument cluster 10
Comfort/convenience, see
Around the centre
console 12
Compact Disc, see
– CD changer 176
– CD player 176
Compartment for remote
control, see Ignition lock 55
Compass 107
"Computer" 73
Computer
– displays on the control
display 72
– hour signal 79
Computer, see iDrive 14, 72
"Concert hall", tonesettings 165
Condensation, see Car
parked 122
Condition Based Service
CBS 203
Configuring settings, see
Personal Profile 26
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking vehicle 29
Congestion
– avoiding 156
– displaying traffic
information 153
– traffic information
announcements 169
Connecting vacuum cleaner,see Connecting electrical
appliances 111
Conserving energy while
driving, see Energy
Control 71
Consumption, see Average
fuel consumption 72
Consumption display
– average consumption 72
– Energy Control 71
"Continue guidance?" 148"Contrast" for TV 188
Control centre, see iDrive 14
Control display
– brightness 83
– changing language 83
– switching on/off 19
Control display, see iDrive 14
Controller, see iDrive 14
Controls and displays 8
Control unit, see iDrive 14
Convenient access 34
– changing battery 36
– what to do in an automatic
car wash 35
Convenient operation
– glass roof 28
– windows 28
Convertible
– loading 122
– securing the load 123
Coolant 202– checking level 202
Coolant temperature 71
Cooling, maximum 100
Cooling fluid, see Coolant 202
Cooling function on/off 101
Cooling system, see
Coolant 202
Copyright 2
Cornering lights, see Adaptive
Head Light 94
Correct tyres 196
"Country" in destination
input 133
Cross-hairs for navigation 138
Cruise control
– active 65
– for 318i, 320i, 318d, 320d 62– malfunction 64
– with brake function in 325i,
330i, 330d 63
Cup holders, see Drinks
holders 110
Current fuel consumption, see
Energy Control 71
Current position
– displaying 157
– entering 142
– storing 142
D
"DAB", digital radio 171, 173
Dashboard, see Instrument
cluster 10
Dashboard lighting, see
Instrument lighting 96
Data, technical
– dimensions 220
– filling capacities 230
– weights 222
"Date" 80
Date
– setting 79
– setting format 80
"Date format" 80
Daytime driving lights 93
"Daytime running
lights" 93, 96
DBC Dynamic BrakeControl 86
DCC, see Cruise control 325i,
330i, 330d 63
Deadlocking, see Locking 28
Deadlocks 27
"Delete address book" in
navigation 144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 242/258
F r o m A t o Z
240
"Delete data" in
navigation 144
Designation
– run-flat tyres 196
Destination address
– deleting 143
– entering 132, 136
Destination in navigation
– destination list 141– entering 132
– home address 144
– manual input 132, 136
– memorising 142
– selecting from address
book 143
– selecting from map 138
– selecting via Information 139
– selecting via language 136
"Destination input map" 138
Destination list for navigationsystem 141
Destinations last driven to 141
"Details" for audio mode 185
Diesel engine, checking oil
level 199
Diesel fuel 193
Diesel particle filter 120
Digital clock 70
Digital compass 107
Dimensions 220
Dipstick, engine oil 199
Direction indicators, see
Flashing turn indicators 60
Direction instructions, see
Voice output 150
"Direct operation" 103
Directory in navigation, see
Address book 142
Display, see iDrive controls 14
Displaying "Memorised
stations" on the radio 166Display lighting, see
Instrument lighting 96
"Display off" 19
"Display on / off" 49
Displays
– on the control display 14
Displays, see Instrument
cluster 10
Displays and controls 8
Disposal
– battery for remote control 36
– car battery 212
– coolant 202
– remote control battery for
independent heating/
ventilation system 104
Distance control, see ActiveCruise Control 65
Distance remaining, see
Remaining operating
range 72
Distance remaining to service,
see Next Service
indicator 75
"Distance to dest." 73
Door entry lighting, see
Interior lights 97
Door key, see Remote controlwith integrated key 26
Door lock 29
"Door locks" 28, 29, 30, 76
Door mirrors 47
Doors, manual operation 30
Doors, unlocking and locking
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Downhill gradients 121
Draught-free ventilation 101
Drawbar load, see Nose
weight 125
Drinks holders 110
Drive-off assistant 88
Driving hints 120
Driving lights, see Side lights/
low-beam headlights 92
Driving lights control,
automatic 92
Driving on right 122Driving stability control
systems 85
Driving through water 121
Dry air, see Cooling
function 101
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 86
– indicator/warning light 86
DVD for navigation 130
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
"Dynamic route" in
navigation 145
"Dynamic route planning" innavigation 156
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
– indicator/warning light 86
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 86
– indicator/warning light 87
E
EBV Electronic Brake ForceDistribution 85
Eject button, see Buttons on
CD player 162
Electric
– seat adjustment 42
Electrical fault
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 192
– glass roof 38
– luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 31
– panorama glass roof 39
Electric seat adjustment 42
Electric seats 42
Electric steering wheel lock
– with convenient access 34
Electric steering-wheel
lock 55
Electric windows, see
Windows 36Electronic Brake Force
Distribution EBV 85
Electronic oil level check 200
Electronic Stabilisation
Program ESP, see Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 86
Emergency call 213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 243/258
241
Emergency operation
– fuel filler flap, manual
release 192
Emergency operation,
automatic gearbox, see
Overriding selector-lever
lock 59
Emergency operation, see
Closing manually– glass roof 38
– panorama glass roof 39
Emergency operation, see
Manual operation
– door lock 30
Emergency release
– luggage compartment lid
from inside 32
Emergency Service, see
Mobile Service 213
Energy Control 71Engine
– overheated, see Coolant
temperature 71
– running in 120
– starting 56
– starting, convenient
access 34
– stopping 56
Engine compartment 199
Engine compartment lid 198
Engine coolant, see
Coolant 202
Engine oil
– adding 201
– additives, see Approved
engine oils 201
– alternative oil grades 202
– approved engine oils 201
– BMW Maintenance
System 203
– checking level 199– dipstick 199
– filling capacity 230
– intervals between changes,
see Next Service
indicator 75
"Engine oil level" 201
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 56
Entering destination 133
Entering destination
country 133
Entering the house number or
junction 135
Entering the street 134
"Entertainment" 163
Environmentally-responsible
driving, see EnergyControl 71
"Equaliser", see Tone
settings 165
Equaliser, see Tone
settings 165
Error messages, see Check
Control 80
ESP Electronic Stabilisation
Program, see Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 86
"Exclude ferries" innavigation 145
"Exclude motorways" in
navigation 145
"Exclude toll roads" in
navigation 145
Exhaust system, see Hot
exhaust system 120
Expanding the luggage
area 113
External audio device 109
External audio device, see
AUX-IN port 183
Eyes
– for lashing loads 123
– for tow-starting and towing
away 215
F
Fader, tone setting 164
Failure messages, see CheckControl 80
Failure of an electrical
consumer 212
False alarm
– avoiding false alarms 34
– switching off alarm 33
Fasten seat belts, see Seat
belts 46
Fastest route in
navigation 144
Fast forward
– CD changer 180
– CD player 180
Fast reverse
– CD changer 180
– CD player 180
"Fast route" in navigation 145Fault
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 59
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 192
– glass roof 38
– luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 31
– panorama glass roof 39
– tyres 89
Fault messages, see CheckControl 80
Favourites, see Sorting
stations with the radio 169
Favourites buttons 19
"Favourites" displaying on
radio 169
Filling capacities 230
Filter
– see Micro-filter/activated
charcoal filter for automatic
air-conditioning system 102
Fine wood, see booklet
Looking after your car
First-aid pouch 214
Fixture for remote control, see
Ignition lock 55
Fixture for telephone or
mobile phone
– see Snap-in adapter in
centre armrest storage
compartment 109Flashing turn indicators 60
– bulb changing 208
Flashing when locking/
unlocking 29
Flat tyre, see Condition of
tyres 195
Floods, see Driving through
water 121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 244/258
F r o m A t o Z
242
Floor carpets, rugs, see
booklet Looking after your
car
"FM", waveband 163, 166
Fog lights 96
– indicator light 11, 96
Folding in mirrors, before
entering a car wash 47
Folding rear-seatbackrest 113
Folding up the floor panel 115
Footbrake, see Safe
braking 121
Footwell lights, see Interior
lights 97
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel-drive, see
xDrive 87
"Frequency selection" 174
Frequency selection,manual 167
Front airbags 90
Front passenger airbags
– deactivating 50
– reactivating 50
Frost protection
– coolant 202
– washer fluid 61
Fuel 193
– additives 194
– average consumption 72
– gauge 71
– grade 193
– leaded 193
– see Average fuel
consumption 72
– see Fuel grade 193
– tank capacity, see Filling
capacities 230
Fuel, adding 192
Fuel display, see Fuelgauge 71
Fuel-efficient driving, see
Energy control 71
Fuel filler flap 192
– unlocking in the event of an
electrical fault 192
Fuel level 71
Fuses 212
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated universal remote
control 105
Gearbox
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 57
– manual gearbox 57– overriding selector-lever
lock for automatic gearbox
with Steptronic 59
Gearbox interlock
– see Changing selector lever
positions 58
– see P Park 58
Gear indicator, automatic
gearbox with Steptronic 58
Gearshift lever
– automatic gearbox withSteptronic 58
– manual gearbox 57
Gearshifts
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 58
– manual gearbox 57
General driving hints 120
Glass roof, electric 37
– closing after electrical
fault 38
– convenient operation 28, 29
– initialising 37
– opening, closing 37
– power failure 37
– raising 37
– remote control 28
– trap protection 37
Glove box 108
– rechargeable hand lamp 109
GPS navigation, see
Navigation system 130Grilles 98
Gross weight, see
Weights 222
Ground lights, see Interior
lights 97
H
Halogen headlights
– bulb changing 206
– driving on left/right 122
– manual beam throw
adjustment 94
Handbrake 57
– indicator light 57Hands-free unit 12
Hazard warning flashers 12
HDC Hill Descent Control 87
Head-level airbags 90
Headlight adjustment, see
Rule of the road 122
Headlight beam throw
adjustment 94
– automatic, xenon
headlights 94
Headlight courtesy delayfeature 93
Headlight cover 206
Headlight flasher 60
– indicator light 9, 11
Headlights
– bulb changing 206
– care, see booklet Looking
after your car
Head restraints 43
– front, removing 44
– rear, removing 44
– safe seated position 41
Heating
– mirrors 47
– rear window 101
– residual heat 101
– seats 45
Heating and ventilation, see
Climate 98
Heating while at a standstill,
see Using residual heat 101Heavy loads, see Loading 122
Height, see Dimensions 220
Height adjustment
– seats 42
– steering wheel 48
High-Beam Assistant 95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 245/258
243
High-beam headlights 94
– bulb changing 206
– headlight flasher 94
– indicator light 11
High beams and low beams,
automatic, see High-Beam
Assistant 95
Hill Descent Control HDC 87
Hints for driving, see Drivinghints 120
Holders for drinks 110
Home address 144
"Home address" in
navigation 144
"Home lights" 93
Hooks for shopping bags 114
Horn 8, 9
Hot exhaust system 120
"Hour memo" 79
Hydraulic brake assist, seeDynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
I
Ice warning, see Outside
temperature warning 70
Icy roads, see Outside
temperature warning 70
ID3 tag, see Information on the
track 178
iDrive 14
– adjusting brightness 83
– assistance window 18
– automatic air-conditioning
system 99
– changing date and time 78
– changing language 83
– changing units of measure
and form of expression 75– confirming a selection or
input 17
– controls 14
– displays, menus 15
– menu guidance 15
– operating principle 14
– overview 14
– selecting a menu item 17
– start menu 15
– status information 18
– switching menu pages 17– symbols 16
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, see Remote
control with integrated
key 26
Ignition key position 1, see
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, see
Ignition on 55
Ignition lock 55
i menu 15
Imitation leather, see booklet
Looking after your car
Imprint 2
"Independent heater" 103
"Independent mode" 103
"Independent ventilation" 103
Independent ventilation/
heating system 102– activating switch-on
times 103
– pre-selecting switch-on
times 103
– remote control 104
– switching on and off
directly 103
Indicator and warning
lights 11
Individual air distribution 99
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 48
Inflation pressures, see Tyre
pressures 195
"Info on destination" 142Information
– on another place 139
– on country 139
– on current location 139
– on destination 139
"Information" in
navigation 140
Information menu, see
i menu 15
"Info sources" 76
Infrared reflectingwindscreen, see Climatic
comfort windscreen 121
Initialising
– active steering 90
– after power failure 212
– compass, see
Calibrating 107
– glass sunroof 37
– panorama glass roof 39
– Run Flat Indicator RPA 88
Inside mirror 47, 48
– automatic-dim 48
– compass 107
Installed position
– CD changer 180
– telephone 109
Instructions from navigation
system, see Voice
messages 150
Instrument cluster 10
Instrument lighting 96Instrument panel, see
Cockpit 8
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 105
Interesting destination for
navigation 139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 246/258
F r o m A t o Z
244
Interior lights 97
– remote control 28
Interior movement
detector 34
Interlock, see Taking out the
remote control 58
Intermittent wiper
operation 60
"Interm. time" 83Internet-based services, see
BMW Online, separate
Operating Instructions
Internet site, BMW 4
ISOFIX child seat
mountings 52
J
Jack
– mounting points 211Jacking points 211
"Journey computer" 73
Journey computer 73
Joystick, see iDrive 14
Jump-starting 214
Junction input 134
K
Kerb weight, see Weights 222
Key, see Integrated key/
remote control 26
Keyless Go, see Convenient
access 34
Keyless locking and
unlocking, see Convenient
access 34
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 26
Keyswitch for front passenger
airbags 50Kick-down 58
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 58
Knock control 193
L
Language, changing on the
control display 83
"Language / Units" 75
"Language / Units" in
navigation 131, 151
"Languages" in
navigation 131, 151"Languages" on the control
display 83
Lap-and-shoulder belt, see
Seat belts 46
Lashings, see Securing the
load 123
Last destinations, see
Destination list 141
"Last seat pos." 46
Laying up car out of use, see
booklet Looking after yourcar
Leaded fuel 193
Leather care, see booklet
Looking after your car
LED light-emitting diodes 206
Length, see Dimensions 220
Licence plate light, bulb
changing 210
"Light" 60
Light-emitting diodes
LED 206
Lighter 110
– connecting electrical
appliances 111
Lighting
– car, see Lights 92
– instruments 96
– lights and bulbs 206
Light metal-alloy wheels, care,
see booklet Looking after
your carLights
– automatic driving lights
control 92
– High-Beam Assistant 95
– see High-Beam Assistant 95
– side lights/low-beam
headlights 92
Lights and bulbs, bulb
change 206
Light switch 92
"Limit" 82
Limit, see Speed limit 82
Load area, see Luggage
area 112
Loads
– car 122– loading 122
– securing 123
– trailer 125
Load-securing equipment,
see Securing the load 123
Location
– drive for navigation DVD and
audio CD 130
Lockable wheel studs, see
Thief-proof wheel studs 211
"Lock button" 28Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 27, 28
– without remote control, see
Convenient access 34
Longlife oils
– alternative oil grades 202
– approved engine oils 202
Low-beam headlights 92
– automatic 92
– bulb changing 206
– headlight beam throw
adjustment 94
Low fuel level, see Fuel
gauge 71
Low fuel level warning light 71
Luggage area 112
– capacity 222
– convenient access 35– folding up the floor
panel 115
– light, see Interior lights 97
– opening from outside 31
– partition net 113
– roller-blind cover 112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 247/258
245
Luggage area lid, see
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 31
Luggage area net, see
Partition net 113
Luggage compartment lid 31
– convenient access 35
– emergency operation, see
Opening manually 31– emergency release
device 32
– opening from outside 31
– opening manually 31
– remote control 28
Luggage rack, see Roof
rack 123
Lumbar support 43
LW waveband 166
M
M+S tyres, see Winter
tyres 197
Maintenance, see Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 203
Making a call, see Telephone
Operating Instructions
"Manual frequency selection",
digital radio 172
"Manual frequency selection"
for radio 167
Manual gearbox 57
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 192
– gearbox interlock, automatic
gearbox 59
– glass roof 38
– luggage compartment lid/tailgate 31
– panorama glass roof 39
Manual operation, automatic
gearbox with Steptronic 59
Map
– changing the scale 150
– destination input 138
"Map, indicating dir. of
travel" 149
"Map north-oriented" 149
Master key, see Remote
control with integrated
key 26
Maximum cooling 100
Maximum speed
– with trailer 126– with winter tyres 197
Measurements, see
Dimensions 220
"Memorised stations", digital
radio 172
Memorising radio
stations 168
Memorising the seat position,
see Seat and mirror
memory 45
Memory, see Seat and mirrormemory 45
MENU button 14
Menus
– control display 15
Menus, see iDrive 14
Message list, traffic
information 154
Micro-filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 203
– for automatic air-
conditioning system 102
Micro-filter/activated charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 203
Microphone
– telephone 12
– voice input 12
Mirrors 47
– heating 47– inside mirror 48
– mirror memory, see Seat and
mirror memory 45
– outside mirrors 47
– parking position function 47
Mobile communication
equipment 121
Mobile phone
– installed position, see
Centre armrest 109
– see separate Operating
Instructions
Mobile phone, installed
position, see Centre
armrest 109
Mobile phone, see separateOperating Instructions
Mobile phones, use inside the
car, see Mobile
communication
equipment 121
Mobile Service 213
Modifications, technical, see
For your own safety 5
Monitor, see iDrive
controls 14
Motorways, see Routecriteria 145
MP3, see Compressed audio
files 176
Multifunctional steering
wheel, see Buttons on
steering wheel 9
Multi-function lever
– see Flashing turn indicators/
headlight flasher 60
Multi-function switch
– see Wiper system 60
Multimedia screen, see
iDrive 14
Music tracks, see Tracks 177
"Mute on / off" 49
MW waveband 166
N
"Navigation" 132, 139
Navigation announcements,see Switching voice
messaging on/off 150
Navigation disc drive, installed
position 130
Navigation DVD 130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 248/258
F r o m A t o Z
246
Navigation system 130
– address book 142
– adjusting volume 151
– avoiding sections of a
route 152
– calling up 132
– changing route 151
– destination input 132
– destination list 141– displaying present
position 157
– displaying the route 148
– ending/resuming route
guidance 147
– entering a destination
address manually 132, 136
– last destinations 141
– navigation DVD 130
– route guidance in the
assistance window 130– route list 150
– searching for a special
destination 139
– selecting destination via
Information 139
– selecting destination via
map 138
– selecting route criteria 144
– starting route guidance 147
– switching off, see Ending/
resuming route
guidance 147
– voice messages 150
Neck restraints, see Head
restraints 43
Nets, see Storage
compartments 109
"New address" in
navigation 142
"New destination" 132, 138
New remote control forindependent heating/
ventilation system 104
"New route for" 152
New transmitter for
independent heating/
ventilation system 104
New tyres 196
"Next entertainment
source" 49
Next Service indicator 75
North-oriented route map 149
Nose weight 125, 226
"No Signal" 172
Nozzles 98
Nozzles, see Ventilation 101
Nylon rope, see Towrope 217
O
OBD socket, see Socket for
on-board diagnosis 203
Octane numbers, see Fuel
grade 193
Odometer – distance
recorder 70
Oil, see Engine oil 199
Oil consumption 199Oil level 199
Old batteries, see
Disposal 212
On-board computer, see
Computer 72
"On-board Info" 72
"On destination" 139, 140
Online, see separate
Operating Instructions
"On location" 139, 140
Opening, see Unlocking 34
Opening and closing
– convenient access 34
– from the inside 30
– from the outside 27
– via the door lock 29
– via the remote control 27
Operating principle, iDrive 14
Orientation menu, see Start
menu 15
"Other place" innavigation 139, 140
Outlets
– see Ventilation 101
Outside-air mode
– automatic air-conditioning
system 100
Outside mirrors
– adjusting 47
– automatic-dim 48
– automatic heating 47
– folding in and out 47
– towing a trailer 126
Outside temperature
display 70
– changing units ofmeasure 75
– in computer 75
Outside temperature
warning 70
Overheated engine, see
Coolant temperature 71
Overriding selector-lever
lock 59
P
Paintwork care, see booklet
Looking after your car
Panorama glass roof 38
– closing after electrical
fault 39
– comfort position 39
– convenient operation 28
– initialising 39
– opening, closing 39
– power failure 39
– raising 38
– remote control 28
– trap protection 39
Park Distance Control PDC 84
Parking aid, see Park Distance
Control PDC 84
Parking assistant, see Park
Distance Control 84
Parking brake, see
Handbrake 57
Parking lights 94– bulb changing 208
Parking position function 47
Particle filter, see Diesel
particle filter 120
Partition net 113
Parts and accessories, see
Your individual vehicle 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 249/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 250/258
F r o m A t o Z
248
Remote control for
independent ventilation/
heating system 104
– battery changing 104
– new remote control 104
Renewing tyres 196
"Repeat directory" for audio
mode 179
"Repeat" for audio mode 179"Repeat track" for audio
mode 179
Replacement fuses, see
Spare fuses 212
Replacement remote
control 26
Reset, see Resetting tone
settings 165
"Reset" for stopwatch 83
"Reset" for tone settings 165
Residual heat 101Restraint systems
– for children 50
– see Seat belts 46
Returning end-of-life vehicles,
see Recycling 204
Reverse gear
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 58
– manual gearbox 57
Reversing lights
– bulb changing 209, 210
Revolution counter 70
RME rapeseed methyl
ester 193
Road map 149
Roadworthiness test, see
Next Service indicator 75
Roller-blind
– roller sunblinds 108
Roller sunblinds 108
RON, see Fuel grade 193Roof load 222
Roof rack 123
Rope, see Tow-starting and
towing away 217
Rotary/pushbutton control,
see iDrive 14
Route 144
– avoiding sections 152
– changing 151
– displaying arrow view 148
– displaying map view 149
– displaying streets and
towns/cities 150
– displaying towns 150
– displays 148– list 150
– selecting 144
– selecting criteria 144
Route, see Displaying
route 148
Route guidance 147
– aborting voice messages 49
– altering route
specifications 144
– avoiding sections of a
route 152– changing course of a
route 151
– displaying the route 148
– distance and arrival time 147
– ending/resuming 147
– starting 147
– voice messages 150
– volume of voice
messages 151
Route instructions, see Route
guidance by voice
messages 150
RPA, see Run Flat Indicator 88
RSC Runflat System
Component, see Run-flat
tyres 196
Rubber parts, see booklet
Looking after your car
Rule of the road, headlight
adjustment 122
Run Flat Indicator RPA 88– indicating a flat tyre 89
– indicator/warning light 89
– initialising the system 88
– malfunction 90
– snow chains 88
– system limits 88
Runflat System Component
RSC, see Run-flat tyres 196
Run-flat tyres 196
– flat tyre 89
– new tyres 196
– renewing 196
– resuming a journey despite a
damaged tyre 89
– Run Flat Indicator 89
– tyre pressure 195
– winter tyres 197Running in 120
Running in the final drive, see
Engine and final drive 120
S
Safe seated position 41
– with airbags 41
– with head restraint 41
– with seat belt 41
Safety lock buttons, doors,see Locking 30
Safety switch for rear
windows 37
Safety systems
– airbags 90
– Anti-lock Brake System
ABS 85
– brake system 86
– driving stability control
systems 85
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
– seat belts 46
Safety tyres, see Run-flat
tyres 196
"Save address" in
navigation 142
"Save" for radio 168
Saving current position 142
Scale change in navigation
system 150"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 167
– sampling tracks on CD 178
"Scan all" for audio mode 179
"Scan directory" for audio
mode 179
Screen, see iDrive controls 14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 251/258
249
Screw thread for towing
eye 216
Search
– CD changer 178
– CD player 178
– radio 167
– TV channels 188
Seat adjustment
– electrical 42– mechanical 42
Seat and mirror memory 45
Seat-belt height
adjustment 46
Seat belt reminder, see
'Fasten seat belts'
reminder 46
Seat belts 46
– 'Fasten seat belts'
reminder 46
– damage 47– indicator/warning light 46
– safe seated position 41
Seat belts, care, see booklet
Looking after your car
Seat heating 45
Seats 42
– adjusting 42
– electrical adjustment 42
– heating 45
– memorising position, see
Seat and mirror memory 45
– memory, see Seat and mirror
memory 45
– safe seated position 41
Securing, vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Securing the load 116, 123
Selecting a country for
navigation 133
Selecting an audio source 162Selecting distance for Active
Cruise Control 66
Selecting menu items 17
Selector lever
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 58
Selector lever interlock, see
Changing selector lever
positions, shiftlock 58
Selector lever positions
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 58
"Service" 76, 201
Service, see Mobile
Service 213Service Booklet 203
Service car, see Mobile
Service 213
Service data in the remote
control 203
Service Interval indicator, see
Condition Based Service
CBS 203
"Service
requirements" 76, 201
"Set date" 80"Set" for audio mode 163
"Set time" 79
Settings
– changing on the control
display 83
– clock, 12h/24h mode 79
– date format 80
– language 83
Settings and information 74
"Settings" for unlocking 27
Settings menu, see i menu 15
Setting time, see Pre-
selecting switch-on
times 103
"Set tyre pressure" 89
Shifting gears
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 59
– manual gearbox 57
Shiftlock
– automatic gearbox, seeChanging selector lever
positions 58
Short commands for the voice
input system 231
Shortest route in navigation,
see Selecting route 144
"Short route" in
navigation 145
"Show / Hide info types" 154
"Show destination
position" 139
"Show vehicle position" 139
Side airbags 90
Side lights 92
Side lights/low-beam
headlights 92
– bulb changing 208Side window blinds, see Roller
sunblinds 108
Side windows, see
Windows 36
Signal horn, see Horn 8, 9
Ski bag 115
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– see Panorama glass roof 38
Slot for remote control 55
Smokers' package, see
Ashtray 110Snap-in adapter, see Centre
armrest storage
compartment 109
Snow chains 197
Socket, on-board diagnosis
OBD 203
Socket, see Connecting
electrical appliances 111
Song search, see Sampling
tracks 178
Soot particle filter, see Diesel
particle filter 120
SOS, see Making an
emergency call 213
Spare fuses 212
Special oils, see Approved
engine oils 201
Speed
– run-flat tyres 89
– when towing a trailer 126
– with winter tyres 197"Speed dependent volume",
see Tone settings 164
Speed-dependent volume
control 164
Speed limit 82
Speedometer 10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 252/258
F r o m A t o Z
250
Split rear-seat backrests, see
Expanding the luggage
area 113
Sport program
– automatic gearbox with
Steptronic 59
Spray nozzles, see Cleaning
windscreen and
headlights 61Stability control, see Driving
stability control systems 85
Start/stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
"Start guidance" 136
Starting difficulties
– jump-starting 214
Starting on uphill gradients,
see Drive-off assistant 88
Starting the engine– start/stop button 55
Starting with a flat battery, see
Jump-starting 214
Start menu 15
Station
– see Radio 166
– see TV 187
"Status" 76
Status at time of printing 5
Status information on the
control display 18
Steering wheel 48
– adjustment 48
– buttons on steering wheel 9
– freely programmable
buttons 48
– interlock, see Electric
steering-wheel lock 48
– lock 55
– lock, see Electric steering-
wheel lock 48– locking with convenient
access 34
– programmable buttons 48
"Steering wheel buttons" 49
Steering with variable gear
ratio, see Active steering 90
Steptronic, see Automatic
gearbox with Steptronic 57
Stopping
– car 56
– engine 56
"Stopwatch" 82
Stopwatch 82
Storage compartments 109
Storing tyres 197
Stowage, see Storage
compartments 109Stowage nets 114
"Street" in destination
input 135
Summer tyres, see Wheels
and tyres 195
Sun roof, see Glass roof,
electric 37
Supply reservoir, see Washer
fluid reservoir 62
"Surround Settings", see
Tone settings 165Switches, see Cockpit 8
Switch for front passenger
airbags 50
Switching audio output for
entertainment systems on/
off 163
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 55
Switching on
– audio 162
– CD changer 162
– CD player 162
– radio 162
– TV 187
Switching on hour signal 79
"Switch-on times" 103
Swivel-mounted trailer tow
hitch, see Trailer tow hitch
with swivel-mounted ball
head 124
SW waveband 166Symbols 4
– navigation system 155
– navigation system traffic
information 153
T
"T" 18
Tailgate 31
– convenient access 35
– emergency operation, see
Opening manually 31
– opening from outside 31
– opening manually 31
– remote control 28
Tailgate, see Luggage
compartment lid/tailgate 31Tail light, see Rear lights 208
– bulb changing 209, 210
Tank capacity, see Filling
capacities 230
Technical data 220
Technical modifications, see
For your own safety 5
Telephone
– installed position, see
Centre armrest 109
– see separate OperatingInstructions
"Telephone list" 49
TeleService, see separate
Operating Instructions 18
Television, see TV 187
Temperature
– automatic air-conditioning
system 99
– changing unit of measure 75
– coolant, see Coolant
temperature 71
Temperature display
– outside temperature 70
– outside temperature
warning 70
– setting units of measure 75
Tempomat, see Cruise
control 62, 63
Tensioning straps, see
Securing the load 123
"Text language" 83"Theatre", tone settings 165
Theft protection
– for wheel studs, see Thief-
proof wheel studs 211
Thief-proof wheel studs 211
Third brake light, see Centre
brake light 211
Through-loading system 111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 253/258
251
Through-loading system, see
Expanding the luggage
area 113
"TI+" 18
Tilt alarm sensor 34
"Time format" 79
Timekeeping, see
Stopwatch 82
Timer, see Pre-selectingswitch-on times 103
"Timer 1" for independent
heating/ventilation
system 103
"Timer 2" for independent
heating/ventilation
system 103
"TMC" 18
TMC stations, see Traffic
information 153
"Tone" 164, 165"Tone", see Tone
settings 164
Tone for audio mode
– centre setting 165
– settings 163
Toolkit 205
Torch, see Rechargeable
hand lamp 109
Towbar 216
Towing a trailer 124
Towing away 215
– cars with automatic
gearbox 215
– methods 216
Towing eyes 215
– screw thread 216
Towing eyes for tow-starting
and towing away 215
Town/city for destination
input 133
Towrope 217Tow-starting 215, 217
"TP" 18, 170
"TP AUTO" 170
TP Traffic Programme 169
Track
– sampling, scan 178
Tracks
– random play 179
– searching for 178
Track width, see
Dimensions 220
Traction aid, see Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 86
Traffic info plus 18
Traffic information fornavigation
– calling up 154
– during route guidance 156
– filtering 154
– representation in the route
map 156
– selecting stations 153
– switching on/off 153
– symbols 155
"Traffic information
settings" 153Traffic reports 169
– switching on/off 170
– TMC stations 153
– Traffic Programme 169
– volume 163
Trailer pulling, see Towing a
trailer 124
Trailer Stability Control 126
Trailer tow hitch 124
Trailer towing
– towing loads and gross
weight 226
Transmitter, see Remote
control for independent
heating/ventilation
system 104
Transporting children 50
Transport securing
equipment, see Securing
the load 123
Trap protection– glass roof, electric 37
– panorama glass roof 39
– windows 36
Tread depth, see Minimum
tread depth 195
Treble, see Tone settings 164
Trip distance recorder 70
Triple turn signal 60
"Triple turn signal
activation" 60
Turn indicators
– triple turn signal 60
Turning circle, see
Dimensions 220
Turn signals
– indicator/warning light 10
"TV" 163TV 187
– changing the channel 187
– changing the standard 188
– controls 162
– picture settings 188
– receivable channels 188
– switching on/off 162
– tone settings 163
– volume 162
Two-stage brake lights 90
Tyre changing, seeNew wheels and tyres 196
Tyre pressure
– loss 89
Tyre pressure monitoring, see
Run Flat Indicator 88
Tyre pressures 125, 195
Tyre puncture, see Run Flat
Indicator 89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 254/258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 255/258
253
Windows 36
– convenient operation 28
– opening, closing 36
– rear window 32
– safety switch 37
– trap protection 36
Windows, displays on the
control display 14
Windscreen– cleaning 61
Windscreen, infrared
reflecting, see Climatic
comfort windscreen 121
Windscreen wiper blades,
changing 205
Windscreen wipers, blades,
care, see booklet Looking
after your car
Winter-grade diesel 193
Winter tyres 197– speed limit 82
– tyre storage 197
Wiper blades, renewing 205
Wiper system 60
Wooden trim, see booklet
Looking after your car
Wordmatch principle for
navigation 145
Work in the engine
compartment 198
Wrench/screwdriver, see
Toolkit 205
X
xDrive 87
Xenon headlights 94
– automatic headlight beam
throw adjustment 94
– bulb changing 206
– driving on left/right 122
Y
Your individual vehicle 5
– settings, see Personal
Profile 26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 256/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 257/258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 258/258
The UltimateDriving Machine
More about BMW
www.bmw.com